JP7260201B1 - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

A gaming machine is provided that has a configuration in which the expected value to be obtained differs between stop operation orders, while suppressing the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game. A specific game state in which the expected acquisition value of game media given when a stop operation is performed at random timing is higher when the stop operation is performed in the second order than when the stop operation is performed in the first order. a game state transition means for transitioning to the second order, an instruction means capable of instructing an advantageous stop operation order, and a specific game state in which the stop operation is performed in the second order compared to the stop operation in the first order. and instruction function control means capable of reducing performance related to the function, the first order includes a plurality of types of stop operation orders, and in a specific game state, each stop operation order of the first order is mutually , the difference in expected acquisition value becomes less than a predetermined value. [Selection drawing] Fig. 12

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a combination of symbols is stop-displayed according to a stop operation mode.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a symbol combination is stop-displayed according to a stop operation mode and game media (for example, medals) corresponding to the symbol combination are provided (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-46985

In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature 1, the expected acquisition value of game media in each game does not change regardless of the stopping operation mode. Therefore, some players may feel that the game lacks interest.

As a configuration for suppressing the above inconvenience, a configuration is conceivable in which the acquisition expected value of the game media is larger when the stop operation is performed in the second order than when the stop operation is performed in the first order. However, in a configuration in which the acquisition expected values are different between the stop operation orders, a new problem may arise that the fairness of the game is impaired depending on the difference in the acquisition expected values. In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to suppress the inconvenience of harming the fairness of a game in a configuration in which the expected acquisition values differ among the stop operation orders.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention includes game starting means for starting a game using a specified number of game values, and in each game, a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, and as a result of the game, symbol display means capable of stop-displaying the combination of symbols, game value imparting means capable of imparting a number of game values corresponding to the symbol combination, and stop operation possible in a first order and a second order different from the first order. winning combination determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of winning combinations with a probability according to the game state; and combination of symbols according to the timing of the stopping operation , the order of the stopping operations , and the winning combination. A pattern variation control means for stopping display, and when a special winning combination among a plurality of types of winning combinations is won in a non-internal medium state, the state in which the special winning combination is won shifts to an internal medium state in which the state in which the special winning combination is won can be maintained in a plurality of games. a possible internal state transition means, a special state transition means for transitioning to a special state when a symbol combination of a special winning hand among symbol combinations is stop-displayed, an instruction means capable of instructing an advantageous stop operation order, and an advantageous transition determining means for determining transition to an instruction period in which a stop operation order is instructed; and an instruction function control means capable of making it difficult to determine the transition to the period. The acquisition expected value determined for each combination of is greater in the second order than in the first order in the internal medium state, the first order includes a plurality of types of stop operation orders, and in the internal medium state, the first order When the difference in the expected value obtained becomes less than a predetermined value between the stop operation orders of , and the non-internal medium state changes to the internal medium state, the amount of increase in the expected value obtained in the first order is Larger in the second order .

According to the present invention, in a configuration in which the acquisition expected value is different between the stop operation orders, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game can be suppressed.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows each symbol arranged on each reel. It is a figure for demonstrating a design display area. It is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning area lottery table. FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram of a winning combination determination table; It is a conceptual diagram of a symbol combination table (first half). It is a conceptual diagram of a symbol combination table (second half). FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an expected acquisition value; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a configuration that produces a difference value; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining details of a configuration that produces a difference value; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an expected value to be obtained for each game state; It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a ball-out state. 4 is a conceptual diagram of an instruction determination table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining each command transmitted from a main control board; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating each display information. FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram of an instruction effect determination table; It is a conceptual diagram of each table used in BB lottery. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of main penalty control; FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram of each table used in stock lottery; FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of main penalty control; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining still another specific example of main penalty control; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of sub-penalty control; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a specific example of each screen when sub-penalty control is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining when to initialize a sub-counter; FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control processing of the main CPU. 7 is a flowchart of advantageous section control processing of the main CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of sub-startup processing of a sub CPU; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining each control mode of a sub CPU; FIG. It is a flowchart of each effect processing of the sub CPU. It is a figure for demonstrating a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating another modification.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION The present invention will now be described in detail with reference to embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Structure of game machine>
The structure of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. A player plays a game on the gaming machine 1 using game media (for example, medals and game balls). In this embodiment, a game machine 1 (pachi-slot machine) using medals as game media is exemplified. It should be noted that, as the game medium, points that are electrically stored may be used (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-116297).

The game machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet having an opening on the front side (player side) and a front door 3 . A hinge mechanism is provided in the cabinet. The front door 3 is pivotally supported by a hinge mechanism so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet.

As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of (14 in the example of FIG. 1) housing lamps 5 are provided on the peripheral side of the front door 3 . Each housing lamp 5 is composed of, for example, a luminous body such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode) and a light transmitting lens that covers the luminous body. The housing lamp 5 emits light in a mode corresponding to each effect in the game machine 1. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 1 , the front door 3 is provided with a waist panel 6 . The name of the gaming machine 1 and the like are drawn on the waist panel 6 . A receiving tray unit 7 for storing medals is provided on the lower side of the waist panel 6 . The tray unit 7 is provided so that the player can freely take out the stored medals.

The front door 3 is provided with a medal insertion portion 8 having an opening into which medals are inserted, and a medal pay-out opening 9 through which medals from inside the game machine 1 are discharged. When a prescribed number of medals (three) are inserted from the medal insertion portion 8, the game can be started. The prescribed number is set according to the state of the game. The medals ejected from the medal payout port 9 are stored in the tray unit 7.

A panel 10 is provided on the front central side of the front door 3. - 特許庁A substantially rectangular display window 11 is formed in the center of the panel 10 . Through the display window 11, a plurality of reels 12 (12L, 12C, 12R) inside the cabinet can be viewed.

Each reel 12 includes a substantially cylindrical drum portion and a strip-shaped sheet member attached to the outer peripheral surface of the drum portion. The sheet member of the reel 12 is light transmissive and has a plurality of types of patterns drawn on it. Each reel 12 is rotatably provided and horizontally arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. Specifically, the reels 12 are arranged so that their rotation axes are positioned on the same straight line. A stepping motor 101 (101L, 101C, 101R) is provided for each reel 12 (not shown), and each reel 12 is rotated by each stepping motor 101. FIG.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing symbols arranged on each reel 12 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 2, the circumference of each reel 12 is divided into 20 pieces. As shown in FIG. 2, one pattern is drawn on each frame. In this embodiment, the N-th frame (N is an integer from numerical value "0" to numerical value "19") from the bottom of the pattern arrangement shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, each reel 12 has a replay symbol, a plum 1 symbol, a plum 2 symbol, a cherry symbol, a bell 1 symbol, a bell 2 symbol, a bell 3 symbol, a bell 4 symbol, a seven symbol and a BAR symbol. be.

Specifically, the replay symbols are symbol positions "0", "4", "6", "10" and "15" on the left reel 12L and symbol positions "4", "9", "14" and "19" on the middle reel 12C. , and symbol positions "1", "6", "11", and "16" on the right reel 12R. Plum 1 symbols are symbol positions "2", "7" and "17" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "1", "6", "11" and "16" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "2" on the right reel 12R. ', '7', '12', and '17'. The plum 2 symbols are arranged at symbol positions "9" and "14" on the left reel 12L and symbol positions "0", "5", "10" and "15" on the right reel 12R. The cherry symbols are symbol positions "5", "12" and "19" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "0", "5", "10" and "15" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "3" on the right reel 12R. "13" and "18" are arranged. Bell 1 symbols are arranged at symbol position "16" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "2" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "4" on the right reel 12R. Bell 2 symbols are arranged at symbol position "1" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "7" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "14" on the right reel 12R. Bell 3 symbols are arranged at symbol position "11" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "12" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "19" on the right reel 12R. Bell 4 symbol is arranged at the symbol position "17" of the middle reel 12C. The seven symbols are arranged at symbol positions "3" and "8" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "8" and "18" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "8" on the right reel 12R. The BAR symbols are arranged at symbol positions "13" and "18" on the left reel 12L, symbol positions "3" and "13" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "9" on the right reel 12R.

In addition, in FIG. 2, each pattern is shown in a color different from the actual color of each pattern. Also, each symbol on each reel 12 can be generally identified by the player even while the reel 12 is rotating. Therefore, the player can perform an operation (so-called eye pressing) to stop the reels 12 at the timing when a specific symbol passes through the display window 11 . A symbol arrangement table (not shown) showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel 12 is stored in the main ROM 302 .

Three symbols are stop-displayed for each reel 12 in the display window 11 of the front door 3 shown in FIG. That is, when all the reels 12 are stopped, a total of 9 symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window 11 . In this embodiment, the area where each pattern is displayed is called a "symbol display area".

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the pattern display area. As shown in FIG. 3, the pattern display area includes each unit area U (L, C, R). One pattern is displayed in each of the unit areas U. As shown in FIG. Each unit area U includes each unit area UL where each symbol of the left reel 12L is displayed, each unit area UC where each symbol of the middle reel 12C is displayed, and each unit where each symbol of the right reel 12R is displayed. area UR. Each unit area UL includes an upper unit area UL1, a middle unit area UL2, and a lower unit area UL3. Each unit area UC includes an upper unit area UC1, a middle unit area UC2, and a lower unit area UC3. Each unit area UR includes an upper unit area UR1 and a middle unit area UR1. and a unit region UR3 located at the bottom.

When a specified number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion section 8, a valid line is set. The effective line is composed of one unit area U of the reel 12L, one unit area U of the reel 12C, and one unit area U of the reel 12R among the unit areas U. area. The effective line in this embodiment is a line connecting the unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the unit area UR2 of the reel 12R.

A symbol combination as a result of the game is stopped and displayed on the active line. When a combination of predetermined symbols on the activated line is stopped, a profit is given to the player according to the stopped combination of symbols. For example, when a winning combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on an active line, medals are awarded to the player. Further, when the combination of symbols for replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the player is granted the right to replay. Specifically, when a combination of symbols for replay is displayed in the current game, the next game can be started without inserting medals. A combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the active line is determined for each game according to the result of an internal lottery process, which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the upper unit area UC1 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an "upper line". Similarly, a line connecting the middle unit area UL2 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the middle unit area UR2 of the reel 12R (effective line in this embodiment) may be referred to as the "middle line". be. A line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the lower unit area UC3 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a "lower line". Also, a line connecting the lower unit area UL3 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the upper unit area UR1 of the reel 12R may be referred to as an "upper right line". Similarly, a line connecting the upper unit area UL1 of the reel 12L, the middle unit area UC2 of the reel 12C, and the lower unit area UR3 of the reel 12R may be referred to as a "lower right line".

Each reel 12 is provided with a backlight (not shown) for illuminating the sheet member of the reel 12 from the inside. Specifically, each of the reels 12 has a backlight for illuminating the upper line unit area U, a backlight for illuminating the middle line unit area U, and a backlight for illuminating the lower line unit area U. be provided.

As shown in FIG. 1, the panel 10 has an input possible display lamp 13, a BET lamp 14 (14a, 14b, 14c), a start lamp 15, an instruction display 16, a accumulated number display 17, a replay display lamp 18, A plurality of indicators (hereinafter referred to as "indicators ML") including a wait lamp 19 and a stop lamp 20 are provided. Each lamp of the indicator ML is controlled by the main CPU 301, which will be described later.

The insertable display lamp 13 notifies whether or not the medals from the medal inserting section 8 can be received. The BET lamp 14 displays the number of bet medals. The BET lamp 14 includes a single lamp 14a, a double lamp 14b and a triple lamp 14c. When one bet medal is set, the one lamp 14a is lit, and when two bet medals are set, the one lamp 14a and the two bet medals 14b are lit, and three bet medals are set. , the one-piece lamp 14a, the two-piece lamp 14b and the three-piece lamp 14c are lit. The start lamp 15 notifies whether or not it is possible to accept a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24, which will be described later).

The instruction display 16 is controlled by the main CPU 301 and displays instruction information for instructing the operation mode (press order) of the stop button 25 . Although details will be described later, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display instruction information in each game during the instruction period. Further, the indicator display 16 displays the number of medals to be given to the player when the symbol combination related to the winning combination is displayed on the activated line. For example, when the symbol combination “seven-cherry-BAR” is stopped on the active line (when “plum-plum-plum” is stopped on the lower line), 13 medals are given to the player, The indication display 16 displays the number "9".

The number of medals given to the player can be electrically stored (stored) in the gaming machine 1 (main RAM 303 described later). In this embodiment, the number of stored medals is referred to as "credit amount". The number of credits is added when medals are given as a result of the game. Also, the number of credits is added when medals are inserted from the medal inserting section 8 in a state in which a prescribed number of bet medals have been inserted. The stored number display 17 displays the number of credits. Specifically, the stored number display 17 variably displays a value from "0" to a value "50", which is the upper limit of the number of credits, according to the number of credits stored.

The replay display lamp 18 notifies that the game is being replayed. Specifically, the replay indicator lamp 18 is lit until the next game ends after the symbol combination related to the replay in the current game is stop-displayed on the active line. By turning on the replay display lamp 18, the player is notified that the next game start operation can be performed without using medals. The wait lamp 19 lights up during a wait period from when a game start operation (operation of a start lever 24 described later) is performed until each reel 12 starts rotating. The wait period is provided to set the average length of time required for one game to a predetermined value (approximately 4.1 seconds) or more. A stop lamp 20 notifies that the game is in a stop state in which the game cannot be played.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 has a 1BET button 21, a MAX-BET button 22, a checkout button 23, a start lever 24, a plurality of stop buttons 25 (25L, 25C, 25R), an effect button 26, and a direction designation button. A plurality of operation units including buttons 27 are provided. Each operation unit is operated by a player.

The 1BET button 21 is operated when setting one bet medal using the accumulated medals. The MAX-BET button 22 is operated when setting a specified number of bet medals using the accumulated medals. The settlement button 23 is operated to settle the medals stored as the number of credits and bet medals. When the settlement button 23 is operated, the total number of medals of the credits and bet medals is paid out from the medal payout port 9. - 特許庁In this embodiment, the operation of the MAX-BET button 22 or the 1-BET button 21 may be referred to as BET operation.

The start lever 24 is operated by the player when starting a game. The player can instruct the start of the game by performing a start operation on the start lever 24 in a state where the game can be started. The start lever 24 of this embodiment can be tilted in any direction by 360 degrees from a state substantially perpendicular to the front door 3 . Also, the grip portion of the start lever 24 is made of translucent resin, and incorporates a lever presentation lamp 42 . The lever effect lamp 42 lights up in a predetermined effect.

The stop button 25 is operated by the player when stopping the reels 12 . Also, the stop button 25 includes a stop button 25L, a stop button 25C, and a stop button 25R. The stop button 25L corresponds to the reel 12L, the stop button 25C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the stop button 25R corresponds to the reel 12R. When the stop button 25 corresponding to the reel 12 is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation") while the reel 12 is rotating, the reel 12 stops (normal stop, pseudo stop).

Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the first stop operation in each game is called the first stop operation. Similarly, the second stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the third stop operation is called the third stop operation. Further, the control by which the gaming machine 1 (main CPU 301 described later) stops the reels 12 based on the first stop operation is called first stop control. Similarly, stop control of the reel 12 based on the second stop operation is referred to as second stop control, and stop control of the reel 12 based on the third stop operation is referred to as third stop control. Further, the symbol position of the reel 12 positioned on the middle line of the display window 11 at the point of time when the stop operation is performed is referred to as the stop operation position. The symbol position positioned on the middle line during rotation of each reel 12 is stored in the symbol counter, and the symbol position of the symbol counter at the time of the stop operation is acquired as the stop operation position. The symbol counter is provided in the main RAM 303, for example.

When all the reels 12 are stopped, the symbol combination resulting from the game is displayed on the active line, and the game is finished. When a game is started, each reel 12 accelerates to a constant rotational speed. During a period in which each reel 12 rotates at a constant speed (a period in which the reels 12 rotate at a steady state), a stop operation for stopping and displaying the game result on the activated line is possible. On the other hand, during the acceleration period from when each reel 12 starts rotating to when the reels 12 rotate steadily, a stop operation for displaying the game results is not accepted even if the reels 12 are rotating.

The stop button 25 of this embodiment can be controlled in a plurality of display modes. Specifically, each stop button 25 is provided with a light emitter (for example, an LED) capable of emitting red, blue, and green light. During the period when the light emitter of the stop button 25 emits red light, the stop button 25 appears to emit red light. Similarly, the stop button 25 appears to emit blue light during the period when the light emitter of the stop button 25 emits blue light, and the stop button 25 appears to emit green light during the period when the light emitter of the stop button 25 emits green light. It appears to emit light. The stop button 25 emits green light when a specific set value (set value "1") among the set values described later is set. According to the above configuration, it can be grasped from the mode of the stop button 25 that a specific set value is set. Note that the mode of the stop button 25 is not limited to the above examples.

The performance button 26 is operated by the player when instructing the performance. For example, the player can instruct execution of a specific effect by operating the effect button 26 . That is, the specific effect is executed with the operation of the effect button 26 as a trigger. It should be noted that the MAX-BET button 22 can also have the function of the presentation button 26 . According to the above configuration, the effect button 26 is omitted, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, when the effect button 26 is operated during the period from the end of the current game to the insertion of bet medals for starting the next game (hereinafter referred to as "non-game period"), the menu image is displayed. is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 .

Operation of the performance button 26 is detected by a performance button switch 26SW. For example, when the production button 26 is not pressed, the production button switch 26SW outputs an OFF signal. On the other hand, when the production button 26 is pressed, the production button switch 26SW outputs an ON signal. During the non-game period, when the effect button switch 26SW changes from the OFF state to the ON state, a menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. - 特許庁

The direction specifying button 27 is operated by the player, for example, when a menu image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 . Direction specifying button 27 includes an up button, a down button, a right button and a left button. For example, by operating the direction designation button 27, it is possible to move a cursor that designates an option displayed on the menu image. Specifically, when the up button is operated, the cursor in the menu image moves upward. Similarly, when the down button is operated, the cursor moves downward, when the right button is operated, the cursor moves rightward, and when the left button is operated, the cursor moves leftward.

When the direction specifying button 27 is operated during the non-game period, the master sound volume of the gaming machine 1 is changed. In addition, during the non-game period, when the direction designation button 27 is appropriately operated, the presentation mode of the game machine 1 can be changed. The production mode of this embodiment is provided with three types, an enjoy mode, a normal mode, and a simple mode. In each production mode described above, the execution frequency of the production is different. Specifically, the enjoyment mode is the most likely to execute an effect among the effect modes. Moreover, the simple mode is the most difficult to execute the effect among the effect modes. In the simple mode of the present embodiment, effects other than the announcement of winning in the BB state, which will be described later, are not executed.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the panel 10 of the front door 3, in addition to the above-described indicator ML (start lamp 15, etc.), a plurality of performance lamps 28 (28a to 28e) and a plurality of stop operation order display lamps 29 (29L, 29C, 29R) are provided. Each lamp of the indicator ML is controlled by the main CPU 301, while each performance lamp 28 and each stop operation order display lamp 29 are controlled by a sub CPU 412, which will be described later. Of the plurality of production lamps 28, the production lamp 28a and the production lamp 28b are provided on the left side of the display window 11 when viewed from the front, and the production lamps 28c to 28e are provided on the right side of the display window 11 when viewed from the front. provided in Each performance lamp 28 notifies the current game state and the like.

Each stop operation order display lamp 29 is provided in a region below the display window 11 of the panel 10 and notifies the order of operation of each stop button 25 . As shown in FIG. 1, above the display window 11 of the front door 3, a liquid crystal display device 30 for displaying various images is provided. The liquid crystal display device 30 displays moving images and still images in accordance with effects executed by the gaming machine 1 . Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 30 reports information related to the result of an internal lottery process, which will be described later, information suggesting the state of the ball being put out, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 1, upper lamps 35 (L, R) are provided on the upper end side of the front door 3 . The upper lamp 35 includes, for example, a light-emitting diode capable of emitting light in each color (blue, yellow, green, red, etc.) and a lens covering the light-emitting diode. For example, when a winning combination is statically displayed on the active line, the upper lamp 35 emits light in a manner (color) corresponding to the winning combination. In addition, the upper lamp 35 emits light in a manner corresponding to each effect.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with speakers 31 (31L, 31R) and speakers 32 (32L, 32R). The speaker 31 is provided on the lower end side of the front door 3 and includes a speaker 31L mounted on the left side and a speaker 31R mounted on the right side as viewed from the player side. The speakers 32 are provided on the upper end side of the front door 3 and include a speaker 32L mounted on the left side and a speaker 32R mounted on the right side as viewed from the player side. The speakers 31 and 32 output sound (music, voice, and sound effects) according to the production. For example, the speaker 31 and the speaker 32 output sound related to the effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 30, the effect lamp 28, the housing lamp 5, the stop operation order display lamp 29, or the lever effect lamp 42 described above. do. The speakers 31 and 32 are attached to the rear surface of the front door 3, and a plurality of sound emitting holes are formed on the front surface of the front door 3 at positions corresponding to the speakers 31 and 32, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 3 is provided with a return button 33 . The return button 33 is operated to clear the medal clogging in the medal channel inside the gaming machine 1 . By operating the return button 33, the medals clogged in the medal channel are ejected from the medal payout port 9. - 特許庁

The front door 3 is provided with a locking device 4 having a keyhole. The front door 3 is locked by engaging the locking device 4 of the front door 3 with a locking piece (not shown) of the cabinet. As shown in FIG. 1, the keyhole of the locking device 4 is located in front of the front door 3, and a key (not shown) for unlocking the front door 3 can be inserted. As will be described later, various operation units (for example, setting change buttons 37) are provided inside the cabinet. Each operation unit inside the cabinet is operated by a manager of a key for unlocking the front door 3 (for example, a store clerk of a game arcade where the game machine 1 is installed).

A main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet. Specifically, the main control board 300 is housed in a transparent board case and attached to the rear panel of the cabinet. Various electronic components including a main CPU 301 to be described later are mounted on the main control board 300 . Also, the main control board 300 is electrically connected to various boards including a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a sub control board 400, and a power supply board 500, which will be described later, via connectors (not shown). The various substrates described above may be configured with a single substrate, or may be configured with a plurality of substrates.

A setting display section 36 and a setting change button 37 are provided inside the cabinet. The setting display unit 36 displays setting values of the gaming machine 1 . The set value is a numerical value related to the payout rate of the gaming machine 1, and various lotteries are executed with probabilities according to the set value in each game. For example, the set values are set from "1" to "6", and the set value "6" has the highest payout rate. In this embodiment, when the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole and rotated, the setting display unit 36 displays the setting value.

A setting change button 37 is operated to change the numerical value of the setting display section 36 . The setting display unit 36 displays the numerical value incremented by one each time the setting change button 37 is operated. When the start lever 24 is operated while the setting value is displayed on the setting display section 36, the numerical value displayed on the setting display section 36 at the time of the operation is stored as the setting value.

However, in this embodiment, numbers “0”, “1”, “2”, “4”, “5”, and “6” are displayed on the setting display section 36 . Specifically, when the power is turned on while the setting change key is rotated, the setting change mode is entered. In the setting change mode, when the start lever 24 is operated while the number "0" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "1" is set. Further, when the start lever 24 is operated while the number "1" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "2" is set. Further, when the start lever 24 is operated during the period when the number "2" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "3" is set.

Similarly, when the start lever 24 is operated during the period when the number "4" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "4" is set and the number "5" is displayed on the setting display section 36. When the start lever 24 is operated at , the set value "5" is set, and when the start lever 24 is operated during the period when the number "6" is displayed on the setting display section 36, the set value "6" is set. be done. When the set value is set, the setting change mode is terminated and the game becomes executable.

A sub-control board 400 is provided on the back surface of the front door 3 . The sub-control board 400 includes various boards including an effect control board 410 , an image control board 420 and a sound board 430 .

A power supply 510 is provided inside the cabinet. The power supply device 510 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter (both not shown), generates a DC voltage from an AC voltage supplied from the outside of the game machine 1, and converts a plurality of types of DC voltages from the generated DC voltage. Generate a DC voltage. For example, the power supply device 510 includes a DC voltage of 32V used to drive the motor and solenoid, a DC voltage of 12V supplied to the liquid crystal display device 30, and a DC voltage of 5V supplied to the electronic circuit board (for example, the main control board 300). to generate a DC voltage of

The power supply device 510 is provided with a power button 511 and a reset button 512 . When the power button 511 is operated to the ON state, power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power button 511 is operated to the OFF state, the power is cut off. A reset button 512 is operated when resetting the ball-out state or the like. Specifically, when the reset button is operated, a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303, which will be described later, is reset to an initial value.

Various electronic components are provided on the main control board 300 . Specifically, various electronic components including main CPU 301 , main ROM 302 , main RAM 303 , resistors, capacitors, connectors, setting display section 36 and main display 40 are mounted on main control board 300 . The connector is used to electrically connect the main control board 300 and other control devices.

<Game machine circuit>
The description of the structure of the game machine 1 is above. The function of each circuit included in the gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG. The game machine 1 comprises a reel board 100, a relay board 200, a main control board 300, a sub control board 400 and a power supply board 500, as shown in FIG.

<Main control board>
The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I/F (interface) circuit 305, as shown in FIG. The main CPU 301, the main ROM 302, and the main RAM 303 may be provided as separate electronic devices, or may be provided as a one-chip microcomputer in which each element is integrated.

The main ROM 302 nonvolatilely stores control programs executed by the main CPU 301 and various data (for example, a winning area lottery table). The main RAM 303 stores various data used in each process executed by the main CPU 301 .

The main CPU 301 reads the control program stored in the main ROM 302 and performs predetermined processing according to the progress of the game, thereby controlling the sub-control board 400, each reel 12, the hopper 520 for paying out medals, and the display ML. control various devices, including

A random number generator 304 generates a random number R1 used in an internal lottery process, which will be described later. The random number generator 304 of this embodiment includes a counter circuit, a sampling circuit, and a pulse generation circuit (none of which are shown), and generates hardware random numbers. Specifically, the pulse generation circuit outputs a signal to the counter circuit at a predetermined cycle. The numerical value of the counter circuit is incremented by "1" each time a signal is input from the pulse generation circuit. The sampling circuit stores the numerical value of the counter circuit as a random number value R1 when the player performs a game start operation. The random number R1 is generated in the range of numbers "0" to "65535". A software random number may be employed as the random number value R1.

In this embodiment, a random number R2 is generated in addition to the random number R1. The random number R2 is a software random number obtained from a register built into the main CPU 301, and is generated within a numerical value range of "0" to "255". As will be described later, the random value R2 is used in the reel effect determination process. In the above-described spinning drum performance determination process, the type of spinning drum performance (pseudo game) is determined by lottery. In the reel performance, each reel 12 is controlled in a manner different from that in the normal game. Also, the main CPU 301 generates a random value R3. The random number R3 is generated in the range of numbers "0" to "255". The random value R3 is used in the later-described determination condition lottery process and the like.

The I/F circuit 305 inputs to the main CPU 301 a signal from each switch SW (for example, the start switch 24SW) of various operation units (for example, the start lever 24) and a signal from each sensor SE (for example, the medal sensor 34SE). A signal from each switch SW and each sensor SE is a high-level or low-level signal. In this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, a signal of a first level (high level or low level) is referred to as an ON signal, and a signal of a second level (low level or high level) is referred to as an OFF signal. do. Whether the first level, which is the ON signal, is high level or low level is set according to the type of the switch SW or the sensor SE. Also, outputting an ON signal (OFF signal) from the switch SW may be described as "the switch SW is in an ON state (OFF state)."

The I/F circuit 305 outputs various signals for driving the indicator ML, the hopper 520 and each reel 12 to the outside of the main control board 300 . Also, the I/F circuit 305 outputs various commands to the sub-control board 400 . Note that commands from the sub-control board 400 are not received by the main control board 300 in order to prevent unauthorized commands from being input to the main control board.

A signal from the main control board 300 is input to the reel board 100 . The reel board 100 outputs a drive pulse to each reel 12 according to a signal from the main control board 300 . Each stepping motor 101 of each reel 12 is driven according to the drive pulse from the reel board 100 .

The stepping motor 101 has multiple (four) coils. The combination of coils to be excited among the coils is sequentially switched each time a driving pulse is input from the reel substrate 100, and each reel 12 rotates by sequentially switching the combination of the coils to be excited. Specifically, when the combination of excited coils of the stepping motor 101 is switched once, the reel 12 rotates by a predetermined angle. For example, when the pulse is applied 24 times, the reel 12 rotates by an angle corresponding to one frame (unit area U), and when the pulse is applied 504 times, the reel 12 rotates once. In the above configuration, the shorter the time interval at which the drive pulse is applied, the faster the reel 12 rotates.

ON/OFF signals from a plurality of reel sensors 111 ( 111 L, 111 C, 111 R) are input to the main control board 300 via the reel board 100 . Of the reel sensors 111, the reel sensor 111L corresponds to the reel 12L, the reel sensor 111C corresponds to the reel 12C, and the reel sensor 111R corresponds to the reel 12R. Each reel sensor 111 outputs an ON signal when the rotation angle of the corresponding reel 12 is at the reference position. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of each reel 12 is other than the reference position, each reel sensor 111 outputs an OFF signal. The main CPU 301 of the main control board 300 can determine the rotation angle of each reel 12 from the signal from each reel sensor 111 and the number of times the drive pulse is output to each stepping motor 101 .

The relay board 200 relays signals from the main control board 300 to the display ML. The display ML is driven according to the signal output from the main control board 300 . Also, the relay board 200 relays ON/OFF signals input to the main control board 300 from sensors (such as a start switch 24SW, which will be described later) that detect the operation of each operation unit (such as the start lever 24). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the relay board 200 relays ON/OFF signals from the 1BET switch 21SW, the MAX-BET switch 22SW, the settlement switch 23SW, the start switch 24SW, the stop switch 25SW, and the medal sensor 34SE. do. Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the power board 500 relays ON/OFF signals of various sensors or switches including the reset switch 512SE and the payout sensor 112SE.

The 1BET switch 21SW detects an operation of the 1BET button 21 by the player. Also, the ON signal from the 1BET switch 21SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200 . The main CPU 301 adds one medal to the bet medals when an ON signal is input from the 1BET switch 21SW.

The MAX-BET switch 22SW detects an operation of the MAX-BET button 22 by the player. Also, the ON signal from the MAX-BET switch 22SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200 . The main CPU 301 sets a specified number of medals as bet medals when an ON signal is input from the MAX-BET switch 22SW.

The settlement switch 23SW detects the operation of the settlement button 23 by the player. An ON signal from the settlement switch 23SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200 .

The main CPU 301 outputs a hopper driving signal to the hopper 520 when an ON signal is input from the settlement switch 23SW, or when a winning symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. A hopper drive signal is input from the main control board 300 to the hopper 520 via the power supply board 500 . The hopper 520 pays out medals when a hopper drive signal is input.

The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal to the main control board 300 each time one medal is paid out from the hopper 520. FIG. Specifically, the payout sensor 112SE is provided at a position where medals passing through the discharge slit 521b of the hopper 520 are detected. The payout sensor 112SE outputs a payout signal when medals are detected. A payout signal is input to the main control board 300 via the power supply board 500 . The main CPU 301 can determine the number of medals paid out by counting the number of times the payout signal is input.

The power switch 511SW is switched between an ON state and an OFF state by operating the power button 511 . When the power switch 511SW is ON, power is supplied from the power supply device 510 to the game machine 1, and when the power switch 511SW is OFF, the power supply from the power supply device 510 to the game machine 1 is shut off. The power supply device 510 generates a DC voltage when power is supplied. A DC voltage generated by the power supply device 510 is supplied to various devices including the hopper 520 via the power supply board 500 .

The reset switch 512SW is provided in the power supply device 510, and outputs a reset signal to the main control board 300 when the reset button 512 is operated. A reset signal is input to the main control board 300 through the power supply board 500 . When the main CPU 301 receives the reset signal, the main CPU 301 initializes a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303, and cancels the error state, for example. Note that a configuration in which a plurality of reset switches 512SW (reset buttons 512) are provided may be employed. For example, in addition to the reset switch 512SW provided in the power supply device 510, the locking device 4 may be provided with a reset switch. In the above configuration, for example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking device 4 and turned to the right, the front door 3 is unlocked, and when the key is turned to the left, a reset signal is output from the reset switch. An output configuration is preferably employed.

The setting change switch 37SW shown in FIG. 4 detects the operation of the setting change button 37. FIG. An ON signal from the setting change switch 37SW is input to the main control board 300 . When an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW, the main CPU 301 updates the display of the setting display section 36. FIG. Further, when an ON signal is input from the setting change switch 37SW during a period in which the setting value is not displayed on the setting display section 36, the main CPU 301 causes the stored number display 16 to display the instructed accessory ratio (described later). . The medal sensor 34SE detects medals inserted from the medal inserting section 8. FIG.

ON/OFF signals from a plurality of stop switches 25SW (25SWL, 25SWC, 25SWR) are input to the main control board 300 via the relay board 200. FIG. Among the stop switches 25SW, the stop switch 25SWL corresponds to the stop button 25L, the stop switch 25SWC corresponds to the stop button 25C, and the stop switch 25SWR corresponds to the stop button 25R. The main CPU 301 controls the stop of the reel 12 corresponding to the stop switch 25SW to which the ON signal is input. Specifically, when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWL, the reel 12L is controlled to stop. Similarly, the main CPU 301 controls to stop the reel 12C when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWC, and controls to stop the reel 12R when an ON signal is input from the stop switch 25SWR.

The start switch 24SW detects the operation of the start lever 24 by the player. An ON signal from the start switch 24 SW is input to the I/F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 via the relay board 200 . The main CPU 301, for example, controls each stepping motor 101 to rotate each reel 12 when an ON signal is input from the start switch 24SW. Also, an ON signal is input to the main control board 300 from the setting change switch 37SW.

The start switch 24SW of this embodiment is formed so as to detect the direction in which the start lever 24 is operated. Specifically, the start switch 24SW can individually detect any of a push-up operation, a push-down operation, a right-side operation, and a left-side operation, as seen from the player's side. be. For example, the start switch 24SW includes a start switch 24SWU that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pushed up, a start switch 24SWD that outputs an ON signal when the start lever 24 is pushed down, and a start switch 24SWD that outputs an ON signal when pushed to the right. It is composed of a plurality of sensors including a start switch 24SWR that outputs a signal and a start switch 24SWL that outputs an ON signal when operated to the left. According to the above configuration, for example, different effects can be executed depending on whether the start lever 24 is pressed down or pushed up.

The main CPU 301 calculates various game information (consecutive role ratio, role ratio, latest consecutive role ratio, latest role ratio, instructed role ratio, bonus game ratio) according to the progress of the game, and The display information corresponding to is displayed on the main display 40 . The display information includes each identification information corresponding to each piece of game information, and ratio information indicating the size of the game information.

The main display 40 includes a first display section 40X and a second display section 40Y. The first display section 40X displays the identification information described above. Also, the second display unit 40Y displays the above-described ratio information. The first display section 40X is composed of two 7-segment displays, and the second display section 40Y is composed of two 7-segment displays. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the main display 40 starts displaying display information, and then continues until the power is turned off. Although details will be described later, the main display 40 displays a plurality of pieces of display information corresponding to various types of game information. Each piece of display information is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (approximately 5 seconds).

<Sub control board>
The sub-control board 400 controls the liquid crystal display device 30, the speakers (31, 32) and each lamp (for example, the production lamp 28). As shown in FIG. 4 , the sub-control board 400 is composed of a plurality of boards including an effect control board 410 , an image control board 420 and a sound board 430 . In addition, the sub-control board 400 includes various sensors including the effect button switch 26SW and the direction specifying switch 27SW, the housing lamp 5, the effect lamp 28, the stop operation order display lamp 29, the lever effect lamp 42, and the upper part. Various lamps including lamp 35 are electrically connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the sub-control board 400 is electrically connected to the volume control switch 44 . A volume adjustment switch 44 is used to adjust the master volume of the gaming machine 1 . A DIP switch, for example, is preferably employed as the volume control switch 44 . As described above, the master volume can also be adjusted by operating the direction specifying button 27 . That is, the master volume is adjusted by operating either the direction designation button 27 or the volume adjustment switch 44 .

In this embodiment, the adjustable master volume differs depending on whether the direction designation button 27 is operated or the volume adjustment switch 44 is operated. Specifically, when the direction specifying button 27 is operated, the master volume can be adjusted to any value from "1" to "5" (five steps). On the other hand, when the volume adjustment switch 44 is operated, the master volume can be adjusted to any of numerical value "1", numerical value "3" and numerical value "5" (three levels). Note that the adjustable master volume may be the same when the direction designation button 27 is operated and when the volume adjustment switch 44 is operated.

The effect control board 410 is configured including an I/F circuit 411, a sub CPU 412, a sub ROM 413, and a sub RAM 414, as shown in FIG. The production control board 410 (sub CPU 412 ) controls various lamps including the housing lamp 5 , the production lamp 28 , the stop operation order display lamp 29 and the lever production lamp 42 , and the sound board 430 . In addition, the effect control board 410 gives commands to the image control board 420 to cause the liquid crystal display device 30 to display each image.

The sub ROM 413 stores control programs executed by the sub CPU 412 and various data. For example, the sub ROM 413 stores an effect lottery table for determining the type of effect and lamp data indicating blinking patterns of various lamps.

The sub-RAM 414 functions as a work area that volatilely stores various data. The I/F circuit 411 receives commands from the main control board 300 (I/F circuit 305). However, the main control board 300 cannot receive commands from the sub-control board 400 . A command received by the I/F circuit 411 is supplied to the sub CPU 412 . The command received by the I/F circuit 411 is, for example, a display winning combination command indicating the type of winning combination stopped on the active line.

The sub CPU 412 executes a control program stored in the sub ROM 413, and controls various lamps (for example, the housing lamp 5) and the sound board 430 based on each data stored in the sub ROM 413. For example, the sub CPU 412 reads data indicating the blinking pattern of the housing lamp 5 from the sub ROM 413 and causes the housing lamp 5 to blink. Also, the sub CPU 412 generates a random number value R4 used in effect control processing and the like, which will be described later. A random number in the range of 0 to 65535, for example, is preferably used as the random number R4. The sub ROM 413 may be composed of a single electronic component, or may be composed of a plurality of electronic components (storage devices).

The image control board 420 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display various images according to commands from the effect control board 410 . The image control board 420 includes an image control CPU 421, an image control ROM 422, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 423, a CGROM 424, and a VRAM 425, as shown in FIG.

Image control CPU421 runs the control program which image control ROM422 memorize|stores, and gives the instruction|indication according to the command from the production|presentation control board 410 to VDP423. The CGROM 424 stores compression-encoded image data (texture data, for example). The VDP 423 includes an image decoder and a rendering circuit (both not shown). When an instruction from the image control CPU 421 is input to the VDP 423, the image decoder reads image data from the CGROM 424 according to the instruction. The image decoder decompresses (decodes) the read image data and stores it in the RAM 425 . The drawing circuit causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display various images according to the image data stored in the RAM 425 . Also, the RAM 425 stores various data generated in each process of the image control CPU 421 . The RAM 425 is provided with a command storage area for storing sound control commands to be transmitted to the sound source IC 431 .

The sound board 430 is controlled by the image control CPU 421 to generate an acoustic signal. Acoustic signals generated by the sound board 430 are supplied to the speakers 31 and 32 and output as sound waves. As shown in FIG. 4, the sound board 430 includes a sound source IC 431 and a sound source ROM 432 . The image control CPU 421 controls the sound board 430 (sound source IC 431 ) according to commands from the sub CPU 412 .

The sound source ROM 432 compresses and stores a plurality of sound data. Each sound data is, for example, data indicating each sound including a particular piece of music in a ball-out state, a sound output each time the player operates the stop button 25, and an error sound output in an error state. .

The sound source IC 431 generates acoustic signals from sound data in the sound source ROM 432 . Also, the sound source IC 431 includes a decoder, a control register, and an A/D converter (none of which is shown). The decoder of sound source IC 431 reads acoustic data from sound source ROM 432 in accordance with an instruction from sub CPU 412 . Also, the decoder of the sound source IC 431 stores the read acoustic data in the control register after adjusting the volume of the read acoustic data. A plurality of pieces of acoustic data are stored in the control register, and each piece of acoustic data stored in the control register is supplied to the A/D converter in the order in which they were stored. The A/D converter generates an acoustic signal from the acoustic data and supplies it to the amplifier 433 . The amplifier 433 amplifies the acoustic signal supplied from the sound source IC 431 (A/D converter) and supplies it to the speakers 31 and 32 . A CPU for controlling the sound source IC 431 may be provided separately from the sub CPU 412 and the image control CPU 421 .

<Each data used by the main CPU>
The description of each circuit of the gaming machine 1 is as above. Various data stored in the main ROM 302 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 5 is a conceptual diagram of a winning area lottery table. The main CPU 301 determines a winning area using a winning area lottery table and a random number value R1 in an internal lottery process to be described later. As shown in FIG. 5, each winning area lottery table includes a plurality of winning areas and each lottery value corresponding to each winning area. FIG. 5 shows the name of each winning area. The winning area lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 for each set value (1 to 6).

FIG. 5 exemplifies the winning area lottery table referred to when the set value is "2". Although the details will be described later, the playability when the set value "1" is set is significantly different from the playability when other set values are set. Specifically, when the set value "1" is set, gambling is remarkably lowered compared to when other set values are set. Therefore, some players may find it lacking in interest. Due to the above circumstances, some administrators of the gaming machine 1 may not set the setting value to "1" in principle.

Each winning area of the winning area lottery table designates each winning combination defined in the winning combination determination table shown in FIG. For example, it is assumed that "replay 1" of winning area number "01" is determined by the internal lottery process. The winning area number "01" designates the winning combination "REP1", the winning combination "REP2" and the winning combination "REP4" as shown in FIG. That is, in the game in which the winning area "Replay 1" is won, multiple kinds of winning combinations are designated. A combination of winning combination symbols specified in the winning area is allowed to stop on the active line.

Each lottery value in the winning area lottery table is subtracted from the random value R1 in the internal lottery process. Specifically, in the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 subtracts each lottery value corresponding to each winning area from the random value R1 in ascending order of winning areas. In the internal lottery process, a winning area is determined in which the result of subtracting the lottery value from the random value R1 is a negative number. The larger the lottery value is, the higher the probability that the random number R1 becomes a negative number when subtracted from the random number value R1.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning area lottery table includes lottery values for each game state. Each gaming state includes a non-internal medium state, an internal medium state and a bonus operating state. In this embodiment, the specified number of coins in each game state is three in common. Of the game states, the game state shifts to the non-internal state when the set value is set (changed) or after the bonus operation state ends. It should be noted that when the set value is changed in the internal medium state, the internal medium state may be maintained.

The internal intermediate state is a gaming state in which the winning state of the RBB combination is carried over (hereinafter simply referred to as "the RBB combination is carried over", etc.). Specifically, in the present embodiment, various winning combinations including RBB combinations are determined in each game. A winning combination other than the RBB combination is not carried over to the next game regardless of whether the symbol combination of the winning combination is stop-displayed. On the other hand, when the symbol combination of the RBB combination is not stop-displayed in the current game, the RBB combination is carried over to the next and subsequent games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 6, in a game in which the winning area "duplicate hand 1" is determined, in addition to the RBB hand, the symbol combination of the winning hand "NML14, 15, 25 to 56" (cherry 1) can be stopped and displayed. Become. If the symbol combination of the RBB role is not stopped and displayed in the game in which the above winning area "duplicate role 1" is determined, the RBB role is carried over to the next game and thereafter (transition to the internal medium state), and other winning roles are next. It is not carried over to the game. The above internal medium state is maintained until the bonus operating state is started. It should be noted that the internal middle state of the present embodiment includes a game in which the RBB combination is won.

The bonus operation state is entered when the symbol combination for the RBB combination is stop-displayed on the active line. The bonus operating state ends when more than 91 medals are paid out. When the bonus activation state ends, the main CPU 301 transitions to the non-internal state. In each game in which the bonus is activated, as shown in FIG. 5, the winning area "whole hand", the winning area "one hand all", the winning area "six hand all" or the winning area "replay 1" are won.

In the game where the winning area "all hands" is won, the winning hands (NML 3 to 13) with 13 payouts are stopped and displayed on the active line, and in the game where the winning area "6 cards all" is won, the number of payouts is increased. In a game in which 6 winning combinations (NML1, 2) are stopped and displayed on the active line and the winning area "1-card combination ALL" is won, winning combinations (NML14 to 104) with 1 payout number are stopped on the active line. Is displayed. In the game in which the winning area "Replay 1" is won, the winning combination "REP1" is stop-displayed on the active line. Each winning combination described above is stop-displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation position in the bonus operation state.

In this embodiment, the RBB combination can be stopped and displayed only when the winning area "RBB" is won (when the RBB combination is won alone) in the non-internal middle state. Further, once the RBB combination is lost, the symbol combination of the RBB combination cannot be stopped and displayed because another winning combination is always won in the subsequent internal state. That is, in this embodiment, the game is executed in principle in the internal medium state.

7 and 8 are conceptual diagrams of symbol combination tables. FIG. 7 shows the first half of the symbol combination table, and FIG. 8 shows the second half of the symbol combination table. The symbol combination table defines combinations of symbols that are permitted to be stopped on the active line in a game in which each winning combination is won. For example, in a game in which the winning combination “RBB combination” is won, the symbol combination “Bell 2-BAR-Seven” is allowed to stop on the active line. Further, for example, in a game in which the winning hand "REP2" is won, the symbol combinations of "Plum 1-Cherry-Plum 1", "Bell 1-Cherry-Plum 1", and "Bell 2-Cherry-Plum 1" are on the active line. can be stopped.

The symbol combination table, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, includes the permission bit number of each symbol combination and the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination associated with each winning combination stops on the active line. 7 and 8 show the number of payouts when the symbol combination associated with each winning combination stops on the activated line. For example, if the symbol combination ``Plum 1-Plum 1-Plum 1'' or ``Plum 2-Plum 1-Plum 1'' of the winning combination ``Plum A1'' is stopped on the active line, the payout number is ``6''. be. Also, the payout number is "0" when the RBB combination of symbols is stop-displayed on the active line.

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the winning combination “REP1” to “REP5” may be referred to as “middle replay”, “upper replay”, “down right replay”, “lower replay” and “up right replay”. Also, the winning combination “NML1” and the winning combination “NML2” may be described as “Plum A1” and “Plum A2”. “Plum A1” and “Plum A2” are plum combinations with a payout number of six. Similarly, the winning combination "NML3" to the winning combination "NML13" may be described as "Plum B1" to "Plum B3", "Plum B4A", "Plum B4B", and "Plum B5" to "Plum B10". . The number of payouts for each plum combination is 13.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, any of the winning hands including the winning hands "Plum A (1, 2)", "Plum B (1 to 10)", and "1 piece hand (1 to 91)". When the symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each winning combination is awarded to the player. In the present embodiment, a winning combination in which medals are paid out when displayed on an activated line is called a "winning winning combination". In some cases, the stopped display of the symbol combination of the winning combination on the active line is simply called "winning".

When any one of the winning combinations ``middle replay'', ``upper replay'', ``lower replay'', ``lower replay'', and ``upper right replay'' is displayed on the active line, the next game is set to replay. In the present embodiment, a winning combination that, when displayed on an activated line, will result in a replay of the next game may be collectively referred to as "replay". When a plurality of winning combinations are won in duplicate, the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line with priority over the other winning combinations, and the RBB combination has a lower priority than the other winning combinations. However, the bonus combination may have a higher priority than the winning combination.

Each permission bit number of the symbol combination table designates each display permission bit of the display permission bit storage area of the main RAM 303 . The display permission bit storage area includes a plurality of display permission bits, and each display permission bit corresponds to each winning combination. For example, it is assumed that "replay 1" of winning area number "01" is won, and symbol combinations of "middle replay", "upper replay" and "lower replay" are permitted to be stopped on the active line. In the above case, the display permission bit designated by the permission bit number "01", the display permission bit designated by the permission bit number "02", and the display designated by the permission bit number "04" in the display permission bit storage area Permission bits are set to '1', others are set to '0'.

The main RAM 303 stores a display combination storage area to be compared with the display permission bit storage area in the display determination process, which will be described later. The display combination storage area includes a plurality of displayable bits, and each displayable bit corresponds to each winning combination (similar to the display permission bit storage area). Further, each displayable bit is set to "1" when there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the winning combination corresponding to the displayable bit will stop on the active line, and the symbol combination related to the corresponding winning combination is valid. It is set to '0' if the line has no chance of stopping. For example, at the time when each reel 12 starts spinning, there is a possibility that all symbol combinations related to winning combinations will stop on the active line, so all displayable bits are set to "1". Each displayable bit in the display combination storage area is updated each time each reel 12 is stopped, and corresponds to the symbol combination related to the winning combination actually stopped on the activated line at the time when all the reels 12 are stopped. Only the displayable bit becomes "1".

The winning combination won in the internal lottery process is stopped on the activated line according to the operation mode of each stop button 25 by the player. Specifically, each winning combination stops on the activated line according to the stop operation position of each stop button 25 and the order of the stop operation. For example, symbols located within a range of 4 frames (5 frames including the stop operation position) from the stop operation position (hereinafter referred to as "pull-in range") can be stopped on the effective line, and symbols located outside the pull-in range , even if it is a symbol that constitutes a winning combination, it is not stopped on the activated line (so-called "dropout" occurs). However, if the symbol of the winning combination that can win a prize is positioned within the pull-in range, the relevant symbol must be stopped on the effective line (if multiple such symbols are positioned within the attract-in range, any one of them will be stopped on the effective line). .

In addition, as described above, in one game, a plurality of types of winning combinations may be won in duplicate. In a game in which a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, for example, the symbol combination related to the winning combinations according to the stop operation order and stop operation position is stopped on the activated line. In this embodiment, the combination of the type of winning hand won in the current game, the stop operation order and the stop operation position, and the symbol combination to be stopped and displayed are associated on a one-to-one basis for each winning area.

As described above, the types of winning combinations to be won change according to the stop operation order. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to a game state (non-internal medium state, internal medium state) in which a stop operation order is provided in which the number of medals to be paid out is one-sidedly advantageous. Hereinafter, the stop operation order in which the number of medals to be paid out is one-sidedly advantageous may be referred to as "advantageous push order", and the stop operation order other than the advantageous push order may be referred to as "disadvantage push order". Further, when the stop operation position is random, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out when the game is played in a specific stop operation order may be referred to as "acquisition expected value A" in the stop operation order. The acquisition expected value A described above is greater in the case of playing the game in the advantageous order than in the case of playing the game in the unfavorable order. However, although the details will be described later, if a game is played in an advantageous pushing order, a penalty control is executed in which the performance of the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is lowered (see FIG. 19, etc., to be described later). ).

FIGS. 9A and 9B are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the expected acquisition value A. FIG. FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b) show specific examples of the acquisition expected value A in the internal medium state among the game states (internal medium state, non-internal medium state, bonus operation state). A specific example of the expected acquisition value A in another game state will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 12(b) and 12(c) described later.

As described above, in this embodiment, the acquisition expected value A may differ between the stop operation orders. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the stop operation order of "left first stop, middle second stop, right third stop" may be simply referred to as "left middle right". The same applies to other stop operation sequences. In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the six types of stopping operation orders of "left-center-right", "left-right-center", "center-left-right", "center-right-left", "right-left-center", and "right-center-left" is changed to "order 1" and "order 2". ", "Order 3", "Order 4", "Order 5", and "Order 6". Furthermore, any one of the above stop operation orders may be simply referred to as "order m". "m" is an integer from the number "1" to the number "6". Further, as shown in FIG. 9(a), the acquisition expected value A of "left center right" (order 1) may be described as "acquisition expected value A1". Similarly, the acquisition expected values A for each stop operation order from "left-right center" (order 2) to "right-center left" (order 6) are described as "acquisition expected value A2" to "acquisition expected value A6". Sometimes.

In the internal intermediate state of the present embodiment, an advantageous pushing order and a disadvantageous pushing order are provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9( a ), “left center right” and “left center right” (left 1st) are disadvantageous pressing orders among the stop operation orders. In addition, among the stop operation orders, "middle right left", "middle left right", "right left middle", "right middle left" (middle 1st, right 1st, hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "irregular pushing order") are advantageous pushing orders. . However, the advantageous pushing order and the unfavorable pushing order can be changed as appropriate. For example, in addition to the left 1st, the middle 1st may be the disadvantageous order, and the right 1st may be the advantageous order.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the stop operation is performed in the advantageous pressing order, the acquisition expected value A increases compared to the case of the unfavorable pressing order, while the performance related to the indication function of the indication display 16. decreases. Therefore, in principle, the player will play on the left 1st. A specific example of the configuration for reducing performance related to the instruction function will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22. FIG.

As described above, the disadvantageous pressing order of the present embodiment includes a plurality of stop operation orders (left-center-right, left-right-center). Although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 9A, the acquisition expected value A1 (AJmin) for "left center right" differs from the acquisition expected value A2 (AJmax) for "left center right". That is, the acquisition expected value A is different between the stop operation orders of the disadvantageous push order. Specifically, the expected acquisition value A1 is smaller than the expected acquisition value A2 by the difference value XJ.

Similarly, the advantageous pressing order of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of stop operation orders (center left/right, center right/left, right left center, right center left). Although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 9A, the acquisition expected value A3 for "middle left/right" and the acquisition expected value A4 for "middle right/left" are common to "AHmim". That is, when the game is played in the middle 1st, the acquisition expected value A is common regardless of the stop operation order. Further, the acquisition expected value A5 for "right-left center" and the acquisition expected value A6 for "right-center-left" are "AHmax" in common. That is, when a game is played on the right 1st, the expected acquisition value A is common regardless of the stop operation order. However, the expected acquisition value A (AHmim) for the middle 1st is smaller than the expected acquisition value A (AHmax) for the right 1st by the difference value XH.

FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the difference value (X, Y). As described above, the difference between the acquisition expected values (A1, A2) in the unfavorable pressing order (left-center-right, left-right-center) is the difference value XJ. Also, the difference between the acquisition expected value (A3, A4) of the middle 1st which is an advantageous pushing order and the acquisition expected value (A5, A6) of the right 1st is the difference value XH.

In the present embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the largest expected acquisition value (A2) among the expected acquisition values (A1, A2) for the disadvantageous order and the smallest expected acquisition value (A3 to A6) for the advantageous order The difference from the acquisition expected value (A3, A4) may be described as "difference value Y". As shown in FIG. 9B, the difference value Y in the internal middle state is the expected acquisition value "AHmim" for the middle 1st of the advantageous pushing order and the expected acquisition value "AJmax" for the "left and right middle" among the unfavorable pushing order. (Y=AHmin-AJmax).

In this embodiment, the expected value A is one-sidedly advantageous in the advantageous pushing order (irregular pushing order) to the unfavorable pushing order (left 1st). executed. Let us assume a configuration in which penalty control is executed in a specific order of stopping operations (hereinafter referred to as "penalty order"), in which the acquisition expected value A of the penalty order is not unilaterally advantageous. As the above configuration, a configuration in which the above-described difference value Y is not sufficiently large can be considered. In the above configuration, if the stopping operation is performed in the penalty order, the penalty control is executed and the number of medals to be paid out is not one-sidedly advantageous, so the penalty order becomes excessively disadvantageous. Therefore, if the game is played in the order of penalty, the player may suffer an excessive disadvantage.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, the difference between the expected acquisition value A in the advantageous order and the expected acquisition value A in the disadvantageous order is set to a predetermined "specific value Ny" or more. . Specifically, a configuration is adopted in which the above-described difference value Y is equal to or greater than a specific value Ny (Y≧Ny). The specific value Ny in this embodiment is a numerical value "0.1". In other words, in the above configuration, the expected value of the total number of medals to be paid out increases by one or more in the case of playing 10 games in the advantageous order compared to the case of playing 10 games in the unfavorable order. be done. Although the details will be described later, the difference value Y changes depending on the game state (non-internal medium state, internal medium state, bonus operation state) (see FIG. 12).

By the way, in the prior art, it is usual that the acquisition expected value A is not changed between each stop operation order of the advantageous pushing order. In addition, it is normal that the acquisition expected value A is not changed between the stop operation orders of the disadvantageous push order. That is, in the conventional technology, the above-described difference value XJ and difference value XH are numerical values "0". However, in the above conventional technology, there is a circumstance that the game lacks interest. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the acquisition expected value A is changed (XJ>0) between the stop operation orders of the advantageous push order. In addition, a configuration is adopted in which the acquisition expected value A is changed (XH>0) between the stop operation orders of the disadvantageous push order. The present embodiment described above has the advantage of improving the amusement of the game as compared with, for example, the above-described prior art.

However, in a configuration in which the acquisition expected value A differs between the stop operation orders of the disadvantageous pressing order, if the difference value XJ is large, the disadvantageous pressing order with the minimum acquisition expected value A may become excessively disadvantageous. In addition, in a configuration in which the acquisition expected value A differs between the stop operation orders of the advantageous pushing order, if the difference value XH is large, the advantageous pushing order with the largest acquisition expected value A may be excessively advantageous. Therefore, in each of the above configurations, a player (especially a beginner of the game) who does not know the acquisition expected value A for each stop operation order is at an excessive disadvantage, and has learned the acquisition expected value A for each stop operation order. A player may have an excessive advantage. That is, the inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired may occur.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, a configuration is employed in which the difference in expected acquisition value A between the respective stop operation orders in the disadvantageous order is less than the predetermined value Nx. In addition, a configuration is adopted in which the difference in the acquisition expected value A between the stop operation orders of the advantageous push order is less than the predetermined value Nx. That is, a configuration is adopted in which the difference value XJ is less than the predetermined value Nx (XJ<Nx) and the difference value XH is less than the predetermined value Nx (XH<Nx). The predetermined value Nx in this embodiment is a numerical value "0.01". The above configuration can also be rephrased that the specific value Ny is 10 times or more the predetermined value Nx. In the above configuration, compared to the configuration in which the difference value X is larger than the predetermined value Nx, for example, the expected acquisition value A is varied to improve the fun of the game, while some players are excessively advantageous or There is an advantage that disadvantageous inconveniences are suppressed. The above configuration will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG.

10(a) and 10(b) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the configuration for generating the difference value X(J, H) and the difference value Y. FIG. FIG. 10(a) shows winning combinations that are won for each combination of the winning area and the stop operation order. In addition, the probability in parentheses written together with the number of payouts shown in FIG. 10A is the probability that the winning combination of the number of payouts will win when the stop operation position is random (hereinafter referred to as "attraction probability Pb". (sometimes). In FIG. 10(a), if the number of payouts is not parenthesized, it means that the winning combination of the number of payouts will win with a probability of 100%. FIG. 10(a) shows the winning combinations that are won in the internal middle state among the game states for each stop operation order.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), each winning area in this embodiment is divided into a specific group (such as Plum L) and each winning area (such as Replay) other than the specific group. Although details will be described later, the main CPU 301 (main control board 300) transmits a command (first command) corresponding to the winning area to the sub CPU 412 (sub control board 400). However, in a game in which a specific group wins, a common first command is transmitted regardless of the type of winning area.

Hereinafter, for explanation, plum L (1-4), plum LC (1, 2), plum LR (1, 2), plum CL (1-4), plum CR (1-4), plum CL (5) , 6), plum CR (5, 6), plum RL (1, 2), plum RC (1, 2), plum RL (3-6), and plum RC3 may be collectively referred to as "batting order plums". In a game in which plums L (1 to 4), plums LC (1, 2) or plums LR (1, 2) are won among the plums in the batting order, the winning combination "Plum A1" or the winning combination " Plum A2” can win. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the winning combination “Plum A1” or the winning combination “Plum A2” may be collectively referred to as “6-card plum combination”.

Also, plum CL (1-4), plum CR (1-4), plum CL (5, 6), plum CR (5, 6), plum RL (1, 2), plum RC (1, 2), In a game in which Plum RL (3 to 6) or Plum RC3 is won, any one of the winning combinations “Plum B1 to B10” can be won according to the stop operation order. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the winning combinations "Plums B1 to B10" may be collectively referred to as "13-card plum combination". Also, the 6-plume combination and the 13-plume combination described above may be collectively referred to as "correct plums". Furthermore, the stop operation order in which the correct plums are stop-displayed may be referred to as "correct push order". On the other hand, the stopping operation order other than the correct answer pressing order may be described as "wrong answer pressing order".

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in a game in which plum L (1 to 4) is won among the plums in the batting order, "left middle right" and "left middle right" (left 1st) are the correct pushing order. When the stop operation is performed, a combination of 6 plums (Plum A1, Plum A2) is won. For example, in a game in which plum L1 out of plums L (1 to 4) is won, plum A1 (6-plum combination) and 1-ply combination 12 to 1-ply combination 19 can be stopped and displayed (see FIG. 6 above). . In a game in which plum L1 is won, plum A1 (correct plum) wins out of six plums when stop operation is performed in the correct order (left 1st).

On the other hand, in the game in which the plum L1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the wrong answers (middle 1st, right 1st), any one of the one-card winnings 12 to 19 can win. Specifically, when the stop operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order in the game in which the plum L1 is won, if the stop operation position is random, one of the winning combinations is won with a probability of 25%, and one of them is won with a probability of 75%. The winning role will not win (something will be lost). The same applies to the game in which the plum L (2 to 4) among the plums in the batting order is won.

In a game in which plum LC (1, 2) is won among plums in the batting order, "left, middle, right" becomes the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, one of the 6 plums (Plum A1, Plum A2) is selected. Kaga wins. For example, in a game in which Plum LC1 is won, Plum A1 (6-plum combination) and 1-ply combination 12 to 1-ply combination 27 can be stopped and displayed. In the game in which the plum LC1 is won, when the stop operation is performed in the correct order (left, middle, right), the plum A1 (correct plum) wins among the six plums.

On the other hand, in the game in which the plum LC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order (other than left, middle, right), any one of the one-card winning combination 12 to one-card winning combination 27 can be won. Specifically, in a game in which the plum LC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, there is a 50% probability that one of the winning combinations will be won, and there is a 50% probability that either one will win. The winning role will not win (something will be lost). The same applies to the game in which the plum LC2 is won among the plums in the batting order.

In a game in which plum LR (1, 2) is won among the plums in the batting order, "left and right middle" is the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, one of the six plums (Plum A1, Plum A2) is played. wins. For example, in a game in which plum LR1 is won, plums A1 (six-plum combination) and one-ply combination 12 to one-ply combination 27 and one-ply combination 89 can be stop-displayed. In the above-described game in which plum LR1 is won, plum A1 (correct plum) wins out of the six-plum combinations when the stop operation is performed in the correct order (right and left middle).

On the other hand, in a game in which plum LR1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order (other than left-right center), any one of 1-card hand 12 to 1-card hand 27 and 1-card hand 89 can be won. Specifically, in a game in which plum LR1 has been won, if the stop operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, one of the winning combinations will be won with a probability of 50%, and one of them will be won with a probability of 50%. The winning role will not win (something will be lost). The same applies to the game in which plum LR2 is won among the plums in the batting order.

In a game in which plums CL (1 to 4) of the batting order plums are won, "middle left and right" is the correct pressing order, and if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-plum combination (plum B1) is won. For example, in a game in which Plum CL1 is won, Plum B1 (13-plum role) and each one-plum role (1, 2, 7, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 70, 90) can be stopped. In the game in which the plum CL1 is won, when the stop operation is performed in the correct order (middle left and right), the plum B1 (correct plum) wins out of the 13 plums.

On the other hand, in a game in which plum CL1 has been won, if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order (other than middle left and right), any one of the above one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game in which plum CL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the left 1st position (left middle right, left right middle) in the incorrect answer pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, 1 piece with a probability of 25%. One of the roles wins, and there is a probability of 75% that it will be lost. Further, in a game in which plum CL1 is won, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (middle right left, right left middle, right middle left) out of the incorrect pushing order, one of the winning combinations will be performed regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to the game in which the plum CL (2 to 4) among the plums in the batting order is won.

In a game in which plum CR (1 to 4) is won among the plums in the batting order, "middle, right, left" becomes the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-plum combination (plum B2) is won. For example, in a game in which Plum CR1 is won, Plum B2 (13-plum combination) and each one-plum combination (1, 6, 7, 12-19, 51-54) can be stopped and displayed. In the above-described game in which plum CR1 is won, plum B2 (correct plum) out of 13 plums wins when the stop operation is performed in the correct order (middle, right, left).

On the other hand, in a game in which Plum CR1 has been won, if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order (other than middle, right, left), any one of the one-card combinations described above can be won. Specifically, in a game in which plum CR1 is won, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st (left middle right, left right middle) in the order of pressing incorrect answers, if the stop operation position is random, one at a probability of 25%. One of the roles wins, and there is a probability of 75% that it will be lost. Further, in a game in which plum CR1 is won, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (middle left/right, right left middle, right middle left) out of the incorrect pressing order, one of the one-card combinations will be performed regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to games in which plums CR (2 to 4) among the plums in the batting order are won.

In the game in which plum CL (5, 6) is won among the plums in the batting order, "middle left and right" becomes the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the 13 plum combination (plum B3) wins. For example, in a game in which Plum CL5 was won, Plum B3, Plum B9 (13 Plum role) and each one Plum role (1, 2, 7, 12 to 19, 52, 53, 55, 56, 77, 79, 86 88) can be stopped. In the above game in which plum CL5 is won, plum B3 (correct plum) out of 13 plums wins when the stop operation is performed in the correct order (middle left and right).

On the other hand, in a game in which plum CL5 has been won, if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order (other than middle left and right), any one of the above-described one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game in which plum CL5 has been won, if the stop operation is performed in the left 1st (left middle right, left right middle) of the incorrect answer pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, 1 piece with a probability of 25% One of the roles wins, and there is a probability of 75% that it will be lost. Further, in a game in which plum CL5 is won, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (middle right left, right left middle, right middle left) out of the incorrect pushing order, one of the one-card combinations will be performed regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to a game in which plum CL6 has been won among the plums in the batting order.

In a game in which plum CR (5, 6) is won among the plums in the batting order, "middle, right, left" becomes the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, 13 plums (plums B4A, B4B, B10) win prizes. do. For example, in a game in which Plum CR5 has been won, Plum B4A, Plum B4B, Plum B10 (13 Plum role) and each one Plum role (1, 2, 19, 28 to 35, 55, 58, 59, 77, 79, 86 to 88) can be stopped. In the above game in which plum CR5 is won, when stop operation is performed in the correct order (middle, right, left), either plum B4A or plum B4B (correct plum) wins according to the stop operation position.

On the other hand, in a game in which Plum CR5 has been won, if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order (other than middle, right, left), any one of the above one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game in which Plum CR5 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the left 1st position (left middle right, left right middle) in the incorrect answer pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, 1 at a probability of 25%. One of the roles wins, and there is a probability of 75% that it will be lost. Further, in a game in which Plum CR5 is won, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (middle left/right, right/left/middle, right/middle left) out of the incorrect pressing order, one of the winning combinations will be performed regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to a game in which plum CR6 has been won among the plums in the batting order.

In a game in which plum RL (1, 2) is won among the plums in the batting order, "right, left, middle" is the correct pressing order, and if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-plum combination (plum B6) is won. For example, in a game in which Plum RL1 is won, Plum B6 (13 Plum role) and 1 Plum role (1, 2, 7, 8 to 12, 17, 23, 24, 30, 37, 66, 90) are stopped. becomes visible. In the above game in which the plum RL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct order (right, left, middle), the plum B6 (correct plum) is won.

On the other hand, in a game in which plum RL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order (other than right, left, middle), any one of the above-described one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game in which plum RL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the left 1st (left middle right, left right middle) of the incorrect answer pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, one at a probability of 25% One of the roles wins, and there is a probability of 75% that it will be lost. Further, in a game in which plum RL1 is won, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (middle left/right, middle right left, right middle left) out of the incorrect pressing order, one of the winning combinations will be performed regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to a game in which plum RL2 is won among the plums in the batting order.

In a game in which plum RC (1, 2) is won among the plums in the batting order, "right, middle, left" is the correct pressing order, and 13 plums (plum B5) are won when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order. For example, in a game in which plum RC1 is won, plum B5 (13 plums role) and each one role (1, 2, 7, 8 to 11, 14, 21, 28, 33, 39, 40, 68, 90) can be stopped and displayed. In the game in which the plum RC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct order (right, left, middle), the plum B5 (correct plum) is won.

On the other hand, in a game in which the plum RC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order (other than right, middle, left), any one of the above-described one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game in which the plum RC1 is won, if the stop operation is performed at the left 1st (left middle right, left right middle) in the incorrect answer pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, 1 at a probability of 25%. One of the roles wins, and there is a probability of 75% that it will be lost. Further, in a game in which plum RC1 is won, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (middle left/right, middle right/left, right/left middle) out of the incorrect pressing order, one of the winning combinations is won regardless of the stop operation position. do. The same applies to the game in which the plum RC2 is won among the plums in the batting order.

In a game in which plums RL (3 to 6) of the batting order plums are won, "right, left, middle" is the correct pressing order, and if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a 13-plum combination (plum B7) is won. For example, in a game in which plum RL3 is won, plum B7 (13-plum role) and each one-plum role (2, 8-11, 16, 23, 30, 50, 54, 73, 78) can be stopped and displayed. . In the game in which plum RL3 is won, plum B7 (correct plum) is won when the stop operation is performed in the correct order (right, left, middle).

On the other hand, in a game in which plum RL3 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the wrong answer pressing order (other than right, left, middle), any one of the above-described one-card combinations can be won. Specifically, in a game in which plum RL3 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the left 1st position (left middle right, left right middle) in the incorrect answer pressing order, if the stop operation position is random, 1 piece with a probability of 25%. One of the roles wins, and there is a probability of 75% that it will be lost. Further, in a game in which plum RL3 is won, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (middle left/right, middle right/left, right/middle left) out of the wrong answer pushing order, one of the winning combinations will be performed regardless of the stop operation position. Win a prize. The same applies to games in which plums RL (4 to 6) have been won among the plums in the batting order.

In a game in which plum RC3 is won among the plums in the batting order, "right middle left" is the correct pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, plum B8 among the 13 plums wins. Specifically, in a game in which plum RC3 is won, plum B8 (13-plum combination) and each one-plum combination (1, 2, 53-55, 70-76) can be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in a game in which plum RC3 is won, if a stop operation is performed in an incorrect answer pressing order (other than right, middle, left), one of the above-described one-card combinations will always win.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the alternative one-piece combination (1 to 4) is won, the one-piece combination can be won regardless of the stop operation order. For example, in a game in which an alternative one-card winning combination is won, one-card winning combination 12 to one-card winning combination 19 can be stop-displayed. In a game in which an alternative one-card role is won, if the stop operation positions are random, one of the one-card roles wins with a probability of 25% and a failure occurs with a probability of 75% regardless of the order of the stop operation. The same applies to the other one-piece hands (2 to 4). The winning combination won in the game in which the specific group (batting order plum, single-choice combination) wins has been described above.

When a replay (1 to 3) is won among the winning areas, one of the symbol combinations of the replay is stop-displayed regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation position. When the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the next game is a replay, and no medals are paid out. However, the expected acquisition value A of the present embodiment is calculated assuming that the prescribed number of medals (three) are paid out in the game in which the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

If a cherry (1, 2) is won in the winning areas, one of the one-card combinations (1, 2, 12 to 43) wins regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation position. Also, if the bell is won in the winning area, one of the one-piece combinations (1 to 7, 12 to 43, 87, 92, 93) wins regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation position. When the ready-to-win combination (1 to 5) in the winning area is won, the winning combination of 1-ply or 13-plum is won according to the order of the stop operation. Specifically, in a game in which a ready-to-win combination (1 to 5) is won, when the left 1st stop operation is performed, one of the one-card combinations is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation position. On the other hand, in a game in which a ready-to-win combination (1 to 5) is won, if stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order, a 13-plum combination is won regardless of the stop operation position.

Details will be described later, but each of the above winning areas (batting order plum, choice 1 hand, replay 1-3, cherry 1, 2, bell, reach eye 1-5) has a difference value X (J, H) It is a winning area that does not give rise to On the other hand, the ready-to-win lottery 6 and the ready-to-win lottery 7 described below are the winning areas that cause the difference value X to occur.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left center right", if the stop operation position is random, one of the one-piece combinations wins with a probability of 70%. , there is a 30% chance of missing. On the other hand, in a game in which the reach win 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the "left and right center", if the stop operation position is random, one of the one-piece roles will win with a probability of 85%, and a failure will occur with a probability of 15%. do. Also, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, if a stop operation is performed in the middle 1st (center left/right, middle right/left), one of the one-piece combinations is won regardless of the stop operation position. On the other hand, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the right 1st (right-left center, right-center left), a 13-plum combination is won regardless of the stop operation position.

In a game in which the reach eye combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left center right", if the stop operation position is random, one of the one-piece combinations will win with a probability of 68.5%, and with a probability of 31.5%. Dropouts occur. On the other hand, in a game in which the reach eye combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the "left and right middle" position, if the stop operation position is random, one of the one-piece combinations will win with a probability of 70%, and a failure will occur with a probability of 30%. do. In addition, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, if a stop operation is performed in the middle 1st (center left/right, middle right/left), a 13-plum combination is won regardless of the stop operation position. Similarly, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the right 1st (right-left center, right-center left), a 13-plum combination is won regardless of the stop operation position.

Note that the 1-card combination that wins in games in which the ready-to-win combination (1 to 7) is won does not win if the left 1st stop operation is performed in games in which other winning areas are won. Therefore, the player can grasp whether or not the ready-to-win combination has been won in the current game, depending on the type of winning one-piece combination (symbol combination). In addition, when the game in which the ready-to-win win 6 or the ready-to-win win 7 is won, the symbol combination (ready-to-win win) that is not stop-displayed in the game in which the other winning area is won is stop-displayed.

In the above configuration, when the left 1st stop operation is performed, it is possible to perceive that the ready-to-win combination has been won from the stop-displayed symbol combination regardless of whether or not there is a dropout. However, there is a case where the winning combination won by the irregular pushing order is common to the reach combination and other winning areas. Therefore, when the stopping operation is performed in an irregular pushing order, it is difficult (including a case where it is substantially impossible) to perceive from the symbol combination that the ready-to-win combination has been won. In addition, the reach stitches in the case where a drop occurs may be the same for the reach stitches 6 and the reach stitches 7, or may be different.

A method of calculating the expected acquisition value A will be described in detail below. The acquisition expected value Am for the stop operation order m (m=1, 2, 3, . In addition, in this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, a group number n (n=1, 2, 3, . For example, group number 1 is given to the group of winning areas for plums L (1 to 4) (n=1). "n" in Equation 1 means a group number.

"Nnm" in Equation 1 is the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in a game in which the winning area of group number n wins when the stop operation is performed in order m (hereinafter referred to as "partial expected value Nnm"). The expected acquisition value Am when the stop operation is performed in the order m is the expected value of the number of medals to be awarded in the game in which the winning area of group number 1 is won, and the medals to be awarded in the game in which the winning area of group number 2 is won. It is the sum of the expected value of the number of medals and the expected value of the number of medals awarded in a game in which the winning area of group number 18 has been won. That is, as can be understood from Equation 1, the acquisition expected value Am when the stop operation is performed in the order m is the sum of partial expected values N(1,m) to partial expected values N(18,m) (Am =N(1,m)+N(2,m)...+N(18,m)). A specific numerical value of the partial expected value Nnm will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b).

"Hnm" in Equation 1 means the number of payouts that can be awarded when the stop operation is performed in order m in a game in which the winning area of group number n wins. That is, the number of payouts Hnm means the number of payouts of a winning combination that can be won (to be drawn in) when the stop operation is performed in the order m in a game in which the winning area of the group number n has been won. As described above, even in a game in which the common winning area is won, the winning combination that can be won changes according to the stop operation order. Therefore, the payout number Hnm changes according to the order m even if the winning area is common (even if n is common).

For example, assume a game in which plum CL of group number 4 has been won (n=4). In the game described above, when the stop operation is performed in the order 1 (left, middle, right: incorrect answer pressing order) (m=1), a one-card combination can be won. Therefore, the payout number H(4, 1) of order 1 in the game in which the plum CL is won is "1" (if n=4 and m=1, H(4, 1)=1). On the other hand, in a game in which plum CL of group number 4 is won, if stop operation is performed in order 3 (middle left and right: correct pushing order) (m=3), the correct plum (13-card combination) can win. Therefore, the payout number H(4, 3) for the order 3 in the game in which the plum CL is won is "13" (H(4, 3)=13 when n=4 and m=3). Similarly, in a game in which plum CL of group number 4 has been won, if the stop operation is performed in order 4 (middle, right, left: wrong answer pushing order) (m=4), one-card combination can be won, so the number of payouts H (4, 4) is "1" (H(4, 4) = 1 when n = 4 and m = 4).

"Pan" in Equation 1 means the probability that one of the winning areas of group number n wins. FIG. 10(a) shows a numerical value obtained by multiplying the probability Pan by the numerical value "65536" when the set value is "2" for each group number n. The numerical value means the total value of each lottery value (see FIG. 5 described above) of each winning area of the group number. For example, the probability Pa4 that one of the plums CL (1 to 4) of group number 4 wins is 4500/65536 (Pa4=(1125+1125+1125+1125)/65536).

"Pbnm" in Equation 1 means the probability of attracting the winning combination when the winning area of group number n is won and the stop operation is performed in the order m. The attraction probability Pb described above is the probability that the winning combination wins when the stopping operation is performed in the order in which the winning combinations are stopped and displayed (the order in which the winning combination is targeted for attraction) and when the stop operation position is random. . As described above, even if the common winning area is won, the winning combination to be drawn in changes according to the stop operation order. Therefore, even if the winning area is a common game, the attraction probability Pbnm changes according to the stop operation order.

For example, in a game in which plums CL (1 to 4) of group number 4 have been won (n=4), when the stop operation is performed in order 1 (m=1), if the stop operation position is random, one hand Win with a probability of 25% (see FIG. 10). Therefore, the attraction probability Pb(4,1) is "0.25" (when n=4 and m=1, Pb(4,1)=0.25). In addition, in a game in which plum CL of group number 4 has been won (n=4), if stop operation is performed in order 3 (correct pushing order) (m=3), 13 plums will be won regardless of the stop operation position. . Therefore, the attraction probability Pb(4,3) is "1" (Pb(4,3)=1 when n=4 and m=3). In a game in which a plum CL of group number 4 is won (n=4), if stop operation is performed in order 4 (m=4), a one-piece combination is won regardless of the stop operation position. Therefore, the attraction probability Pb(4,4) is "1" (Pb(4,4)=1 when n=4 and m=4).

As described above, the partial expected value Nnm is the product of the payout number Hnm, the winning probability Pan and the attraction probability Pbnm (Nnm=Hnm*Pan*Pbnm). For example, the winning probability Pa4 of plums CL (1 to 4) of group number 4 is 4500/65536. Further, when the plum CL (1 to 4) of the group number 4 is won and the stop operation is performed in the order 3, the attraction probability Pb (4, 3) is "1", and the payout number H (4, 3) is It is "13". Therefore, the partial expected value N(4,3) will be approximately "0.892639" (N(4,3)=H(4,3)*Pa4*Pb(4,3)=13*(4500/ 65536)×1≈0.892639 (see FIG. 10(b)).

FIG. 10(b) shows a specific example of the partial expected value Nnm for each combination of the winning area group number (n) and the stopping operation order (m). Specifically, FIG. 10(b) shows the partial expected value Nnm in the internal middle state among the game states. For example, as described above, when the plum CL (1 to 4) of group number 4 is won and the stop operation is performed in order 3 (n = 4, m = 3), the partial expected value N (4, 3) is It is approximately "0.892639". However, in FIG. 10(b), the fractional expected value Nnm after the seventh decimal place is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the winning area of group number 1 is won, the partial expected value Nnm is common between order 1 (left, middle, right) and order 2 (left, right, middle) of the unfavorable pressing order. Specifically, the partial expected value N(1, 1) and the partial expected value N(1, 2) are approximately "0.420776" in common. On the other hand, if either the winning area of group number 2 or group number 3 is won, the partial expected value Nnm differs between order 1 (left, middle, right) and order 2 (left, right, middle) of the unfavorable pressing order (N (2,1)≠N(2,2), N(3,1)≠N(3,2)).

However, as shown in FIG. 10(b), when the winning area of group number 2 is won, the partial expected value N (2, 1) when the stop operation is performed in order 1, and the winning area of group number 3 is won. The partial expected value N(3, 2) when the stop operation is performed in the order 2 is about "0.456116" in common. Also, the partial expected value N (2, 2) when the stop operation is performed in order 2 when the winning area of group number 2 is won, and the stop operation is performed in order 1 when the winning area of group number 3 is won The partial expected value N(3, 1) for the case is commonly about "0.038010".

As shown in FIG. 10B, in any of the winning areas of group numbers 4 to 16, the partial expected value Nnm is Common. For example, in the case of group number 4, the partial expected value N(4,1) of order 1 and the partial expected value N(4,2) of order 2 are approximately "0.017166" in common.

Similarly, for group numbers 5 to 10, each of the partial expected value N(5,1) of order 1, the partial expected value N(6,1) . It is approximately "0.017166" in common with each of the expected value N(5,2), the partial expected value N(6,2), . Also, for group numbers 11 to 16, partial expected values N(11,1) and partial expected values N(11,2), partial expected values N(12,1) and partial expected values N(12,2), Partial expected value N(13,1) and partial expected value N(13,2), partial expected value N(14,1) and partial expected value N(14,2), partial expected value N(15,1) and The partial expected value N(15,2), the partial expected value N(16,1), and the partial expected value N(16,2) are common.

As can be understood from the above description, the total value of the partial expected values Nnm of group numbers 1 to 16 is common among the disadvantageous orders (order 1 and order 2). The above configuration can also be rephrased so that the winning areas of group numbers 1 to 16 do not generate the difference value XJ. Further, although detailed description is omitted, as can be understood from FIG. become. The above configuration can also be rephrased so that the winning areas of group numbers 1 to 16 do not generate the difference value XH.

On the other hand, the partial expected value Nnm of group number 17 (reach target 6) is about "0.000075" in order 1 of the unfavorable pushing order (N (17, 1) ≈ 0.000075), and in order 2 It is "0.000091" (N(17,2)≈0.000091). In addition, the partial expected value Nnm of group number 18 (reach target 7) is "0.000073" in order 1 of the unfavorable pushing order (N (18, 1) ≈ 0.000073), and in order 2 " 0.000075” (N(18,2)≈0.000075). In the above configuration, the total value of the partial expected values Nnm of group number 17 and group number 18 differs between the disadvantageous order. The above configuration can be rephrased so that each winning area of group number 17 and group number 18 produces the difference value XJ.

In addition, the partial expected value Nnm of group number 17 (reach target 6) is "0.000107" in order 3 and order 4 (middle 1st) of the advantageous pushing order (N (17, 3) = N ( 17,4)≈0.000107), and “0.001389” in orders 5 and 6 (right 1st) (N(17,5)=N(17,6)≈0.001389). On the other hand, the partial expected value Nnm of the group number 18 (reach target 7) is "0.001389" in common in the advantageous pushing order (N (18, 3) = N (18, 4) = N ( 18,5)=N(18,6)≈0.001389). In the above configuration, the total value of the partial expected values Nnm of group number 17 and group number 18 differs between advantageous pushing orders. In other words, the above configuration is such that each winning area of group number 17 and group number 18 produces the difference value XH.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the difference value XJ and the difference value XH are greater than the numerical value "0" in the internal intermediate state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the expected acquisition value A1 of the order 1 among the unfavorable pushing orders is about "1.568396", and the expected acquisition value A2 of the order 2 is about "1.568414". is. That is, the difference value XJ is approximately "0.000018". In addition, the expected acquisition value A of the order 3 and the order 4 among the advantageous pushing orders is commonly about '2.766903', and the expected acquisition value A of the order 5 and the order 6 is commonly about '2.768185'. is. That is, the difference value XH is approximately "0.001282".

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, in the game in which a specific winning area is won, the winning combination to be won and the stop operation mode (order, position) for winning the winning combination are common to each game. It may be described as "common stop control". Stop control in each game is in principle common between the internal middle state and the non-internal middle state if the winning area is common. However, among plums in the batting order, plum CL (5, 6) (group number 6), plum CR (5, 6) (group number 7), plum RL (1, 2) (group number 8) and plum RL (1, 2) In a game in which (group number 9) is won, the stop control is different between the internal state and the non-internal state.

Specifically, when the above-mentioned batting order plum is won in the non-internal state, one of the winning combinations is won regardless of the stop operation mode. That is, when the above-mentioned batting order plum is won in the non-internal medium state, even if the stop operation is performed in the correct pushing order in the internal medium state, one of the winning combinations wins, and the correct plum does not win. In the above configuration, the partial expected value N (6, 3) of order 3 (correct pressing order) in group number 6 is about "0.892639" in the internal middle state (see FIG. 10(b)), It becomes (decreases) about "0.068665" in the non-internal medium state.

Similarly, the partial expected value N (7, 4) of order 4 (correct pressing order) in group number 7 is about "0.892639" in the internal medium state, but about "0.068665" in the non-internal medium state. "become. The partial expected value N (8, 5) of order 5 (correct pressing order) in group number 8 is approximately "0.892639" in the internal medium state, but becomes approximately "0.068665" in the non-internal medium state. . The partial expected value N(9, 6) of order 6 (correct pressing order) in group number 9 is approximately "0.892639" in the internal medium state, but becomes approximately "0.068665" in the non-internal medium state. .

Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the game in which the double hand 1 (cherry 1) is won in the non-internal medium state, the stop control is common to the game in which the cherry 1 is won in the internal medium state. Similarly, in a game in which duplicate role 2 (Cherry 2) is won, stop control is common to the game in which Cherry 2 is won, and in a game in which duplicate role 3 (Bell) is won, the game in which Bell is won and stop control are performed. are common, and in games in which overlapping hands 4 to 10 (ready wins 1 to 7) are won, stop control is common to games in which ready wins 1 to 7 are won, and overlapping wins 11 to 14 (choice 1 In the game in which the winning combination 1 to 4) is won, the stop control is common to the game in which the single winning combination 1 to 4 is won.

By the way, among the winning areas, group number 12 (choice of one card), group number 13 (replay), group number 14 (cherry), and group number 15 (bell) have an expected acquisition value A regardless of the stop operation order. Common. That is, the winning area (hereinafter referred to as "common winning area") is a winning area that does not cause the difference value (X, Y) without considering each partial expected value N of each stop operation order of other winning areas. It is also paraphrased as there is. In particular, group number 13 (replay) and group number 15 (bell) are winning areas that do not generate a differential value regardless of the stop operation position. In other words, in this embodiment, even in a game in which the common winning area is won, penalty control is executed when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration for generating the difference value X(J, H). In this embodiment, the difference value X is generated by appropriately switching the winning combination to be pulled into the activated line according to the stop operation order and the stop operation position. As described above, the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the active line is determined in advance for each combination of stop operation order, stop operation position and winning area. Specifically, in the present embodiment, even if the winning area is common, the type of symbol "pull-in control" changes according to the stop operation order. The "pull-in control" of the present embodiment includes "symbol number priority control" and "payout number priority control".

First, prior to the configuration for generating the difference value X (the pull-in control of the reach marks 6 and 7), the pull-in control when the batting order plum is won will be described. For example, as described above, in a game in which plum CL1 is won, plum B1 (13 plums) and 1 plums (1, 2, 7, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44) , 70, 90) can be stopped. In the above-described game in which plum CL1 is won, when the stop operation is performed with "middle left and right" (correct order), all the reels 12 are stopped by payout number priority control. However, the type of pull-in control may be switched midway between the first stop operation and the third stop operation.

In the payout number priority control, among the symbols of the winning combination that can be won, the symbol of the winning combination with the largest number of payouts is preferentially stopped and displayed on the activated line. Therefore, in a game in which plum CL1 is won, the symbol combination of plum B1 is stopped and displayed on the active line. When a winning combination with the largest number of payouts can be won in a plurality of types, when the payout number priority control is executed, the symbols of the winning combination predetermined according to the stop operation position are stop-displayed on the activated line.

On the other hand, in a game in which plum CL1 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the left 1st or right 1st (incorrect answer pressing order), the first reel 12 is stopped by symbol number priority control. When the reels 12 are stopped by the symbol number priority control, the reels 12 are stopped so that the number of types of winning combination of symbols that can be won after the reels 12 are stopped is maximized. In addition, when there are a plurality of stop positions (symbols) where the number of types of symbol combinations of winning combinations that can be won is the maximum, when the symbol number priority control is executed, a predetermined winning combination is determined according to the stop operation position. symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line.

For example, in a game in which Plum CL1 is won, each of the above-mentioned one-card combinations (1, 2, 7, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 70, 90) can be won. . In the above-described game in which plum CL1 is won, when "Plum 1 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop on the left, there are 6 types of 1-card hands (12, 20, 28, 36, 44, 70). symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line by the subsequent stop operation position (see FIGS. 7 and 8). Similarly, in a game in which Plum CL1 is won, when the "Plum 2 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop on the left, six types of one-card hands (16, 24, 32, 40, 44, 70 ) symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line by the subsequent stop operation position.

On the other hand, if the left symbol of Plum B1 (13 cards) is stop-displayed on the active line at the left first stop, then there are four kinds of symbol combinations that can be stop-displayed on the active line (see FIG. 7). Therefore, in the game in which plum CL1 is won, when the left first stop is made, the symbol of the one-card role (Plum 1 symbol, plum 2 symbol) is prioritized over the plum B1 (13-card role), and is stopped and displayed on the active line. be. When the right first stop is made in the game in which the plum CL1 is won, the symbol number priority control is executed in the same way as when the left first stop is made, and the symbols of the single hand (Plum 1 symbol, Plum 2 symbol) are given priority. and is displayed as a stop on the active line.

In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the "middle right left" of the incorrect pressing order, the correct pressing order is performed up to the middle first stop, so the payout number priority control is executed at the middle first stop, and the plum B1 "cherry" Symbol" is stopped and displayed on the active line. In the above case, after that, in addition to the plum B1 pattern combination (5 types), 6 types of 1-card role (1, 2, 90) (1 type of 1-card role 1, 3 types of 1-card role 2, 1-card role A total of 6 types (2 types of 90) can be stop-displayed (see FIGS. 7 and 8). If the right second stop is performed after the middle first stop, the right reel 12 is stopped by the symbol number priority control, and one of the right symbols of each of the above-described one-card combinations is stopped and displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, after the middle first stop, when the left second stop is performed (when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order), the left reel 12 is stopped by payout number priority control, and the left symbol of plum B1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

FIG. 11(a-1) is a diagram for explaining the attracting probability (Pb in Equation 1 above) of each winning combination in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won. Details will be described below, but in a game in which the reach number 6 or the reach number 7 is won, symbol number priority control is executed when the reel 12 is stopped at the left first stop, and in other cases (second stop, When the reel 12 is stopped by the third stop, the middle first stop, and the right first stop), payout number priority control is executed. However, when the middle first stop is made in the game in which the ready-to-win win 6 is won, symbol number priority control is executed exceptionally.

As described above, the reach target 6 is the winning area that gives rise to the difference value XJ. FIG. 11(a-1) shows the pull-in probability when the stop operation is performed at "left center right". In a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the "left center right", any of the one-card combinations can be won (see FIG. 10(a)). Specifically, in a game in which the ready-to-win win 6 is won, when the left first stop is made, the left reel 12 is stopped by symbol number priority control. In the above case, depending on the stop operation position of the left reel 12, the left symbol (replay symbol) or 1 of the 1-card hand 1 or 1-card hand 57 (hereinafter abbreviated as "1-card hand 1, 57" etc.) The left symbols (bell 1 symbol, bell 2 symbol) of 49, 50, and 85 are stop-displayed on the active line.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11(a-1), when the left reel 12 is operated to stop at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), the left symbols of 1 and 57 are stopped and displayed on the active line. . When the left symbols of 1 and 57 are stop-displayed on the activated line, 1-symbols 49, 50 and 85 whose left symbols are bell (1, 2) symbols cannot be won. In a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, when the middle second stop is performed after the left first stop, the middle reel 12 is stopped by payout number priority control.

In the above configuration, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), regardless of the stop operation position of the middle second stop (when the stop operation is performed at any symbol position 0 to 19) ), the middle symbol (cherry symbol) of one-card role 1 or the middle symbol of one-card role 57 (bell 1-4 symbols) can be pulled into the effective line. In the present embodiment, in the middle second stop, the middle symbol of the one-card combination 57 is stop-displayed on the activated line (one-card combination 1 cannot be won). After that, when the right third stop is made, the right reel 12 is stopped by the payout number priority control, and the right symbol of the single winning combination 57 is stopped and displayed on the effective line regardless of the stop operation position. As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-center-right" position in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the attraction probability of the one-piece combination 57 is 4800 (12×20×20)/8000. .

When the left reel 12 is stopped at the symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, 19 (8 frames) in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the left symbols of the one-piece combinations 49, 50, 85 (Bell 1, 2 symbol) is stopped and displayed on the active line. When the left symbols of 1-symbols 49, 50 and 85 are stop-displayed on the activated line, 1-symbols 1 and 57 whose left symbols are replay symbols cannot be won. After that, when the middle reel 12 is subjected to the second stop operation at the symbol positions 2 to 6 (five frames), the middle symbol (bell 1 symbol) of the single hand 49 is stop-displayed on the activated line. When the medium symbol of the one-card combination 49 is stop-displayed on the activated line, the one-card combination 50 and 85 cannot be won. After that, when the right reel 12 is subjected to the third stop operation at symbol positions 8 to 12 (five frames), the right symbol (seven symbol) of the one-symbol combination 49 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (the one-symbol combination 49 wins a prize). do). On the other hand, when the right reel 12 is subjected to the third stop operation at symbol positions 0 to 7 and 13 to 19 (15 frames), the right symbol of the one-piece combination 49 is not positioned within the retraction range, so that the winning occurs. As can be understood from the above description, if the stop operation is performed in the "left-center-right" position in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the attraction probability of the one-piece combination 49 is 200 (8×5×5)/8000. .

In a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18 and 19 (8 frames), and the middle reel 12 is operated to be at symbol positions 0, 1, 7 to 19 (15 frames). When the second stop operation is performed, the middle symbols (bell 2 to 4 symbols) of the single-card combination 50 are stopped and displayed on the active line (the single-card combination 50 is tenpai). When the middle symbol of the one-piece combination 50 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the one-piece combination 49 and 85 cannot be won. After that, when the right reel 12 is subjected to the third stop operation at symbol positions 8 to 12 (five frames), the right symbol (seven symbol) of 1-symbol 50 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (1-symbol 50 wins). do). On the other hand, when the right reel 12 is subjected to the third stop operation at symbol positions 0 to 7 and 13 to 19 (15 frames), the right symbol of the one-piece combination 50 is not positioned within the retraction range, so that the winning occurs. As can be understood from the above description, if the stop operation is performed in the "left-center-right" position in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the pull-in probability of the one-piece combination 50 is 600 (8×15×5)/8000. . As described above, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left center right", the sum of the pull-in probability of the one-card combination becomes 5600/8000 (70%).

FIG. 11(a-2) is another diagram for explaining the attraction probability of each winning combination in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won. FIG. 11(a-2) shows the pull-in probability when the stop operation is performed in the "left-right middle" position. As described above with reference to FIG. 11(a-1), when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames) in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, one-piece combination 1 , 57 left symbols (replay symbols) are stopped and displayed on the active line.

In the configuration of this embodiment, when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), regardless of the stop operation position of the right second stop, the right symbol of the single hand 1 becomes the effective line. It is stopped and displayed (one hand 1 is tenpai). After that, when the middle third stop is made, the middle symbol of 1-card combination 1 is stop-displayed on the active line regardless of the stop operation position (1-card combination wins). As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-right center" in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the attraction probability of the one-card combination 1 is 4800 (12*20*20)/8000.

As described above with reference to FIG. 11(a-1), when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, 19 (8 frames) in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, The left symbols of 1-card winnings 49, 50 and 85 are stop-displayed on the active line. After that, when the right reel 12 is subjected to the second stop operation at symbol positions 8 to 12 (five frames), the right symbol (seven symbol) of one-symbol 49 and 50 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (one-symbol 49 and 1 piece hand 50 tenpai). When the right symbols of the 1-card combination 49 and 50 are stop-displayed on the activated line, the 1-card combination 85 cannot be won. After that, when the middle reel 12 is subjected to the third stop operation at the symbol positions 2 to 6 (5 frames), the middle symbol (bell 1 symbol) of the one-piece combination 49 is stopped and displayed on the activated line (the one-piece combination 49 is winning). As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-right center" in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the attraction probability of the one-piece combination 49 is 200 (8*5*5)/8000.

In a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18 and 19 (8 frames), and the right reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 8 to 12 (5 frames) for the second stop operation. After that, when the middle reel 12 is subjected to the third stop operation at the symbol positions 0, 1, 7 to 19 (15 frames), the middle symbols (bell 2 to 4 symbols) of the one-piece role 50 are stopped and displayed on the activated line. (50 wins for 1 card). As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-right center" in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the pull-in probability of the one-piece combination 50 is 600 (8*5*15)/8000.

On the other hand, after the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18 and 19 (8 frames), the right reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 7 and 13 to 19 (15 frames). Then, the right symbol (BAR symbol, bell 1 to 3 symbols) of the one-card combination 85 is stop-displayed on the activated line (the one-card combination 85 is tenpai). When the right symbol of the 1-card combination 85 is stop-displayed on the activated line, the 1-card combination 49 and 50 cannot be won. After that, when the middle reel 12 is subjected to the third stop operation at the symbol positions 0 to 2, 18, 19, 8 to 12 (10 frames), the middle symbol (seven symbol) of 1 card combination 85 is stopped and displayed on the activated line. (1 piece role 85 wins). On the other hand, when the right reel 12 is subjected to the third stop operation at symbol positions 3 to 7 and 13 to 17 (10 frames), the middle symbol of the one-piece combination 85 is not positioned within the retraction range, so that a missing figure occurs. As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-right center" in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the winning probability of the one-piece combination 85 is 1200 (8*15*10)/8000. As described above, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the "left and right center", the sum of the pull-in probability of the one-card combination becomes 6800/8000 (85%).

FIG. 11(b-1) is a diagram for explaining the attraction probability of each winning combination in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won. As described above, the reach target 7 is the winning area that gives rise to the difference value XJ. FIG. 11(b-1) shows the pull-in probability when the stop operation is performed at "left center right". As described above, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, any one-piece combination can be won when the stop operation is performed in the "left center right" (see FIG. 10(a)). Specifically, in a game in which the ready-to-win win 7 is won, when the left first stop is made, the left reel 12 is stopped by symbol number priority control. In the above case, depending on the stop operation position of the left reel 12, the left symbol (replay symbol) of the single hand 1, 84, 89 or the left symbol of the single hand 90 (Bell 1 symbol, Bell 2 symbol) is the effective line. displayed to stop.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11(b-1), when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), the left symbols of 1-card hands 1, 84 and 89 are stopped and displayed on the activated line. be done. When the left symbols of 1, 84 and 89 are stop-displayed on the activated line, the 1-symbol 90 whose left symbol is the bell symbol cannot be won. In a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, when the middle second stop is performed after the left first stop, the middle reel 12 is stopped by payout number priority control. In the above configuration, when the left reel 12 is stopped at the symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), one of 1, 84, and 89 is selected according to the symbol position of the middle second stop operation. The middle pattern can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), and the middle reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 5 to 7 (3 frames). When operated, the middle symbol (cherry symbol) of the one-card combination 1 is stop-displayed on the active line of the middle reel 12.例文帳に追加When the left symbol and the middle symbol of the 1-symbol combination 1 are stop-displayed on the activated line, the 1-symbol combination 1 wins regardless of the stop operation position of the right reel 12.例文帳に追加As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-center-right" position in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the pull-in probability of the one-piece combination 1 is 720 (12×3×20)/8000. .

In a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames), and the middle reel 12 is subjected to a second stop operation at symbol positions 0 to 4 and 11 to 19 (14 frames). Then, the middle symbol (replay symbol) of the one-piece combination 84 is stop-displayed on the active line of the middle reel 12 . If the right reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 8 to 12 (five frames) when the left and middle symbols of the one-piece combination 84 are stop-displayed on the activated line, the one-piece combination 84 is won. On the other hand, when the right reel 12 is stopped at the symbol positions 0 to 7, 13 to 19 (15 frames), the right symbol (seven symbol) of the one-piece hand 84 is not located within the drawing range, so that the winning occurs. As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-center-right" position in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the pull-in probability of the one-piece combination 84 is 840 (12×14×5)/8000. .

When the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames) and the middle reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 8 to 10 (3 frames) in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, A middle symbol (seven symbol) of a one-piece combination 89 is stop-displayed on the active line of the middle reel 12 . When the left symbol and the middle symbol of the 1-symbol combination 89 are stop-displayed on the activated line, the 1-symbol combination 89 is won regardless of the stop operation position of the right reel 12 . As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-center-right" position in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the attraction probability of the one-piece combination 89 is 720 (12×3×20)/8000. .

When the left reel 12 is stopped at the symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, 19 (8 frames) in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the left symbol of the one-piece combination 90 (Bell 1 symbol, Bell 2 symbol). is displayed on the active line. When the left symbol of the 1-card combination 90 is stop-displayed on the activated line, the 1-card combination 1, 84 and 89 cannot be won. Also, when the left symbol of the one-piece combination 90 is stop-displayed on the activated line, the one-piece combination 90 wins (does not miss) regardless of the stop operation positions of the middle reel 12 and the right reel 12 . As can be understood from the above description, if the stop operation is performed in the "left-center-right" position in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the attraction probability of the one-piece combination 90 is 3200 (8×20×20)/8000. . As described above, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left center right", the sum of the pull-in probability of the one-card combination becomes 5480/8000 (68.5%).

FIG. 11(b-2) is another diagram for explaining the attraction probability of each winning combination in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won. FIG. 11(b-2) shows the pull-in probability when the stop operation is performed in the "left-right middle" position.

As described above with reference to FIG. 11(b-1), when the left reel 12 is stopped at the symbol positions 6 to 17 (12 frames) in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the one-piece combination 1 , 84 and 89 (replay symbols) are stopped and displayed on the active line. In a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, when left symbols (replay symbols) of single-hands 1, 84, and 89 are stop-displayed on the active line, the single-handed hand is displayed regardless of the stop operation position of the right second stop. The right symbol (replay symbol) of 89 is stopped and displayed on the activated line. After that, when the middle reel 12 is stopped for the third time at the symbol positions 0 to 2, 18, 19, 8 to 12 (10 frames), the middle symbol (seven symbol) of 1 card combination 89 is stopped and displayed on the activated line. (One-piece role 89 wins). On the other hand, when the middle reel 12 is subjected to the third stop operation at symbol positions 3 to 7 and 13 to 17 (10 frames), the middle symbol of the one-piece hand 89 is not positioned within the pull-in range, resulting in a dropout. As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-right center" in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the attraction probability of the one-piece combination 89 is 2400 (12*20*10)/8000.

As shown in FIG. 11(b-2), when the left reel 12 is stopped at symbol positions 0 to 5, 18, 19 (8 frames) in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the right second stop and the A one-piece hand 90 wins regardless of the stop operation position of the middle third stop. As can be understood from the above description, when the stop operation is performed in the "left-right center" in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the pull-in probability of the one-piece combination 90 is 3200 (8*20*20)/8000. As described above, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the "left and right center", the sum of the pull-in probability of the one-card combination becomes 5600/8000 (70%).

In the above-described embodiment, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left-center-right", the total attraction probability of the one-card combination becomes 70%. On the other hand, in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the "left and right center", the attraction probability of the one-piece combination becomes 85%. In addition, in a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed with "left center right", the sum of the pull-in probability of the one-card combination becomes 68.5%. On the other hand, in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, if the stop operation is performed in the "left and right center", the attraction probability of the one-piece combination becomes 70%. That is, in the present embodiment, the difference value XJ is greater than or equal to "0". According to the above configuration, even if the unfavorable pressing order (left-center-right, left-right-center) is changed, the attraction probability of the one-card combination changes, so that the effect of improving the interest of the game can be achieved.

FIGS. 11(c-1) and 11(c-2) are diagrams for explaining the configuration for generating the difference value XH. FIG. 11(c-1) shows a game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, and shows winning combinations that are won when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order (middle 1st, right 1st). As shown in FIG. 11(c-1), when the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st in the game in which the ready-to-win combination 6 is won, the one-piece combination 1 is won regardless of the stop operation position. On the other hand, if the right 1st stop operation is performed, Plum B6 (13-card plum combination) wins regardless of the stop operation position.

FIG. 11(c-2) shows a game in which the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, and shows a winning combination that is won when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order (middle 1st, right 1st). As shown in FIG. 11(c-2), in the game in which the reach eye combination 7 is won, the case where the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st stage and the case where the stop operation is performed in the right 1st stage are common plum B6 (13-card plum combination). wins. According to the above configuration, the difference value XH becomes larger than the numerical value "0". Therefore, the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game is particularly remarkable as compared with, for example, a configuration in which the difference value X (XJ, XH) does not occur.

12A to 12C are diagrams for explaining specific examples of the difference value Y. FIG. 12(a) to (c) show the difference value Y for each game state (internal medium state, non-internal medium state, bonus operation state). The vertical axes in FIGS. 12(a) to 12(c) indicate the magnitude of the acquisition expected value A. FIG. 12(a) to (c) show the difference value X(J, H). In this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the difference value Y in the internal middle state of the game state may be described as "difference value Ya", and the difference value Y in the non-internal middle state may be described as "difference value Yb". be. Further, the difference value XJ in the internal middle state of the game state may be described as "difference value XJa", and the difference value XJ in the non-internal middle state may be described as "difference value XJb". Similarly, the difference value XH in the internal middle state of the game state may be described as "difference value XHa", and the difference value XH in the non-internal middle state may be described as "difference value XHb".

FIG. 12(a) is a diagram for explaining the difference value Ya in the internal middle state of the game state. FIG. 12(a) shows the acquisition expected values A (1 to 6) in the internal intermediate state for each stopping operation order.

As described above, in the internal medium state, the left 1st (left middle right, left right middle) is the unfavorable push order, and among the acquisition expected values A (1, 2) of the unfavorable push order, the expected acquisition value for "left and right middle" A2 becomes the maximum value. Also, the difference value XJa is approximately "0.0000182" (XJ=A2-A1≈0.0000182). Furthermore, in the internal middle state, the irregular pushing order (middle 1st, right 1st) becomes an advantageous pushing order, and among the expected acquisition values A (3 to 6) of the advantageous pushing order, the right 1st (right left middle, right middle left) is the maximum value. Also, the difference value XHa is approximately "0.0012818" (XH=A(3,4)-A(5,6)≈0.0012818).

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the internal middle state, the difference between the expected acquisition value A2 in the "left and right center" and the expected acquisition value A(3, 4) in the middle 1st is the difference value Ya. Specifically, the difference value Ya in the internal medium state is approximately "1.1984886" (Y=A(3,4)-A2≈1.1984886). In the internal medium state, if the stop operation is performed in the advantageous order of pressing, the performance of the indication function of the indication indicator 16 is degraded.

In the internal middle state of the present embodiment, the expected value A to be acquired is different between the unfavorable pressing orders, but when the stop operation is performed in the unfavorable pressing order, the performance related to the indicating function of the indication display 16 decreases regardless of the stop operation order. do not. Specifically, in the internal middle state, the performance related to the indication function of the indication indicator 16 is common between the disadvantageous pressing orders. Although details will be described later, in the internal medium state, processing (BB lottery, specific counter update, stock lottery processing, etc.) related to the instruction function is executed under common conditions regardless of the type of disadvantageous pushing order. In addition, in the internal medium state of the present embodiment, the acquisition expected value A is different between the advantageous pushing orders, but when the stopping operation is performed in the advantageous pushing order, the performance of the indicating function of the indication display 16 depends on the stopping operation order. decrease uniformly. Specifically, in the internal middle state, the performance related to the indication function of the indication indicator 16 is common between the advantageous pressing orders. Although the details will be described later, common penalty control is executed in the internal intermediate state regardless of the type of advantageous pushing order.

FIG. 12(b) is a diagram for explaining the difference value Yb in the non-internal middle state of the game state. FIG. 12(b) shows acquisition expected values A (1 to 6) in each stop operation sequence in the non-internal state. Further, FIG. 12(b) shows the difference value Ya in the internal medium state so as to be comparable with the difference value Yb in the non-internal medium state. Although the details will be described later, the difference value Ya is larger than the difference value Yb. That is, when the non-internal medium state is shifted to the internal medium state, the difference value Y increases.

In the non-internal middle state, as in the internal middle state, the left 1st stroke becomes the unfavorable stroke order, and the irregular stroke order becomes the advantageous stroke order. Further, as can be understood from FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b), the acquisition expected value A1 in "left-center-right" is common between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Similarly, the acquisition expected value A2 in "left-center-right" is common between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. In the above configuration, the difference value XJb in the non-internal medium state is common to the difference value XJa in the internal medium state (XJa=XJb).

On the other hand, the acquisition expected value A (3 to 6) in the advantageous pushing order (irregular pushing order) is greater in the internal medium state than in the non-internal medium state. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B, in the internal intermediate state, when the stop operation is performed in the correct stroke order in the game in which the batting order plum has been won, the correct plum (13 The role of Plum, the role of 6 Plums) won the prize. However, for some of the batting order plums whose correct pressing order is an irregular pressing order, if the prize is won in the non-internal middle state, a pull-in control is executed in which the correct plumbing does not win.

Specifically, if any one of plum CL (5, 6), plum CR (5, 6), plum RL (1, 2), and plum RC (1, 2) wins in a non-internal state, stop The reels 12 are stopped by symbol number priority control at the time of the first stop operation regardless of the operation order. In the above configuration, when the plum in the batting order wins in the non-internal medium state, even if the stop operation is performed in the correct pushing order in the internal medium state, one of the winning combinations wins, and the correct plum does not win. . In addition, winning combinations to be won in games in which other winning areas are won are common between the non-internal medium state and the internal medium state as long as the stop operation mode (order, position) is common. Therefore, the acquisition expected value A (3 to 6) in the advantageous pushing order is greater in the internal medium state than in the non-internal medium state.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), the acquisition expected value A3 for "middle left/right" and the acquisition expected value A4 for "middle right/left" in the advantageous pushing order are common at approximately "1.9429283". Further, the acquisition expected value A5 for "right-left middle" and the acquisition expected value A6 for "right-center left" in the advantageous pushing order are about "1.9442101" in common. In the above configuration, the difference value Yb in the non-internal medium state is approximately "0.374514", which is smaller than the difference value Ya (≈1.1984886) in the internal medium state. However, the difference value Yb in the non-internal medium state is larger than the above-mentioned specific value Ny "0.1".

In the non-internal middle state of the present embodiment, the acquisition expected value A differs depending on the unfavorable pressing order, but when the stop operation is performed in the unfavorable pressing order, the performance related to the indicating function of the indication display 16 does not depend on the stop operation order. not decrease. Specifically, in the non-internal middle state, the performance related to the indication function of the indication indicator 16 is common to the disadvantageous pressing orders. That is, in the non-internal middle state, processing (BB lottery, update of specific counter, stock lottery processing, etc.) related to the instruction function is executed under common conditions regardless of the type of disadvantageous pressing order. In addition, in the non-internal middle state of the present embodiment, the acquisition expected value A is different between the advantageous pushing orders, but when the stop operation is performed in the advantageous pushing order, the performance related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is in the stop operation order. Decrease uniformly regardless of Specifically, in the non-internal middle state, the performance related to the indication function of the indication indicator 16 is common among the advantageous pressing orders. That is, in the non-internal intermediate state, common penalty control is executed regardless of the type of advantageous pushing order.

In this embodiment, the difference value XHb in the non-internal medium state and the difference value XHa in the internal medium state are common. However, the difference value XHb in the non-internal middle state and the difference value XHa in the internal middle state may be different. Similarly, the difference value XJb in the non-internal medium state and the difference value XJa in the internal medium state may be different. For the sake of explanation, the maximum value among the expected acquisition values A (1 to 6) in the non-internal medium state may be referred to as "expected acquisition value Amax". The expected acquisition value Amax of the present embodiment is the expected acquisition value A(5, 6), as shown in FIG. 12(b).

FIG. 12(c) is a diagram for explaining the difference value Y in the bonus operation state among the game states. FIG. 12(c) shows each acquisition expected value A (1 to 6) in each stop operation order in the bonus operation state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12(c), in the bonus operation state, the acquisition expected value A is "1.9442139" regardless of the stop operation order. Therefore, the difference value Y is a numerical value "0", and the difference value X (XJ, XH) is a numerical value "0". However, in the bonus operation state, each acquisition expected value A may be different in each stop operation order. For example, in the bonus operation state, depending on the order of the stop operation, a difference of less than the above-described predetermined value Nx (0.01) may occur in the expected acquisition value A. In addition, a unilaterally advantageous stop operation order may be provided even in the bonus operating state. However, in the above configuration, from the viewpoint of suppressing the player's confusion, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the unilaterally advantageous stop operation order is common to each game state.

FIG. 12(c) shows the acquisition expected value Amax in the non-internal medium state described above with reference to FIG. 12(b). In this embodiment, each expected acquisition value A (1 to 6) in each stop operation order in the bonus operation state is larger than the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal middle state. Specifically, the expected acquisition value A in the bonus operation state is greater than the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state by approximately "0.0000038" ("Z" in the figure). In addition, when adopting a configuration in which each expected acquisition value A in each stop operation order is different in the bonus operation state, the minimum expected acquisition value A among the expected acquisition values A is the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state. Larger configurations are preferred.

By the way, in the winning game of the RBB role in the non-internal middle state, the player has the symbol combination of the RBB role stop-displayed (hit) on the activated line to shift to the bonus operation state, and the symbols of the RBB role. There are players who do not stop displaying the combination on the active line and shift to the internal medium state. Let us assume a configuration (hereinafter referred to as “contrast”) in which each of the expected acquisition values A (1 to 6) in each stop operation order in the bonus operating state is smaller than the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state. In the above-mentioned comparison, there is a problem that the player who shifts to the bonus operating state is likely to be significantly disadvantageous to the player who shifts to the internal middle state. In other words, in the case of contrast, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is likely to occur. In the configuration of the present embodiment, the expected acquisition value A in the bonus operation state is larger than the expected acquisition value Amax in the non-internal medium state, so there is an advantage that the above-described inconvenience is suppressed.

In the bonus operation state of the present embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in the left 1st position, the performance of the indicating function of the indication display 16 does not deteriorate regardless of the stop operation order. Specifically, in the bonus operation state, the performance related to the indication function of the indication indicator 16 is common between "left center right" and "left center right". That is, in the bonus operation state, processing (BB lottery, specific counter update, stock lottery processing, etc.) related to the instruction function is executed under common conditions for "left-center-right" and "left-right-center". In addition, in the bonus operation state of the present embodiment, when the stopping operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the performance of the indicating function of the indication display 16 uniformly decreases regardless of the stopping operation order. Specifically, in the bonus operation state, the performance related to the indication function of the indication indicator 16 is common between the irregular pressing orders. That is, in the bonus operating state, common penalty control is executed regardless of the type of irregular pushing order.

FIG. 13(a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the ball-out state of the main CPU 301. FIG. As shown in FIG. 13(a), the main CPU 301 controls the game in either the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section.

In the non-advantageous section, processing related to the instruction function (processing related to the transition of the ball output state (update processing, lottery processing), processing for executing the instruction on the instruction display 16, excluding the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous interval described later. etc.) are not executed at all. That is, the non-advantageous section is a section in which the instruction on the instruction display 16 is not executed. On the other hand, the advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function is executed. That is, it is a section in which an instruction on the instruction indicator 16 can be executed.

In this embodiment, the main RAM 303 stores a ball payout state flag indicating the current ball payout state. The main CPU 301 transmits a payout state command indicating a payout state flag to the sub CPU 412 in each game. The sub CPU 412 determines an effect in accordance with the ball output state indicated by the ball output state command.

In principle, the advantageous section ends after a non-advantageous section is determined by a transition lottery, which will be described later. However, the advantageous section may end at any other occasion. Specifically, the advantageous section ends when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times. Also, the advantageous section ends when the net increase in the number of medals from the start of the increase in medals reaches 2400 medals. When any of the above triggers is established, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of the current ball output state and game state.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned net increase number is counted by the MY counter. Also, the number of games played in the advantageous interval is counted by the advantageous interval counter. Each counter described above is provided in the main RAM 303, for example. It should be noted that the advantageous section may end when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 3000 times. Further, as the trigger for forcibly ending the advantageous section, only the trigger that the MY counter reaches the numerical value "2400" may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), it is possible to shift to each payout state including normal state, pullback state, heaven chance state, heaven state, super heaven state, BB state and EDBB state in the advantageous section. Hereinafter, among the ball-out states, a ball-out state (so-called "AT state") in which an instruction on the instruction display 16 is executed may be collectively referred to as an "instruction period". In addition, a ball-out state in which no instruction is given on the instruction display 16 may be collectively called a "non-instruction period". In this embodiment, the BB state and the EDBB state are designated periods, and the other ball-out states are non-designated periods.

When a predetermined winning area is won in a non-advantageous section, the game shifts to a specific ball-out state (pull-back state, heaven chance state, BB state) out of the respective ball-out states in the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, when an area other than the winning areas "replay 1" and "RBB" (see FIG. 5 described above) is won, the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section. In a game in which a non-advantageous section is shifted to an advantageous section, an advantageous section transition process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is employed in which the advantageous section is always started in the game in which the above-described winning area is won. However, a predetermined lottery may be executed when the winning area is won, and when the lottery wins, the advantageous section is started, and when the winning area is lost, the non-advantageous section is maintained.

The content of the advantageous section transition processing changes according to the game state (non-internal state, internal state). Specifically, as described above, the game is basically executed in the internal middle state except immediately after the setting value is changed (immediately after the game hall opens). Therefore, in principle, the advantageous section transition processing is executed in the internal medium state. In addition, when the advantageous interval transition processing is executed in a game in which an RBB combination (duplicate combinations 1 to 14) is won, the content of the advantageous interval transition processing becomes the internal intermediate state. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section transition processing is not executed in the bonus operating state. However, it is also possible to provide a winning area that is won with a common probability in the non-internal medium state and the bonus operating state, and to execute the advantageous section transition processing when the winning area is won in the bonus operating state.

A special lottery is executed in the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section in the internal middle state. In the above special lottery, the transition to the BB state is determined with a probability of about 27.3% when cherry 1 or cherry 2 (double role 1 or double role 2) is won. In addition, in the special lottery, when the winning lottery (1 to 7) is won, the transition to the BB state is determined with a probability of 100%. In the special lottery, the transition to the BB state is determined with a probability of about 0.1% when a player other than Cherry (1, 2) and Reach (1-7) wins. In addition, in the special lottery, if the ready-to-win wins (1 to 7) are won, the configuration may be such that the game moves to the premium BB state in a modified example described later. When the transition to the BB state is determined in the special lottery, the next game (the first game in the advantageous section) shifts to the BB state (opportunity (A) in FIG. 13(a)).

In addition, in the first game in the BB state, an effect is executed to notify that the game will shift to the BB state immediately after the start operation. Also, in the first game in the BB state, a pseudo-game is executed before the stop operation becomes possible (before each reel 12 rotates steadily). As a configuration for executing a pseudo-game, for example, a configuration described in Japanese Patent No. 6867053 may be employed. In the pseudo-game described above, three seven symbols are displayed on any line, and then each reel 12 rotates steadily. On the other hand, in the special lottery, if the transition to the BB state is not determined, then the state shifts to the heaven chance state (opportunity (B) in FIG. 13(a)).

A special lottery is not executed in the advantageous section transition processing in the non-internal state. As a specific example in which the advantageous section transition processing is executed in the non-internal medium state, in the non-internal medium state immediately after the setting value is changed, before the RBB hand (duplicate hand 1 to 4) is won, the advantageous section It is assumed that migration processing is executed. When the advantageous section transition processing is executed in the non-internal intermediate state, in principle, the transition is made to the pullback state in the advantageous section (opportunity (C) in FIG. 13(a)).

As can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, the player is more advantageous if the advantageous interval transition processing is executed in the internal middle state rather than the advantageous interval transition processing is executed in the non-internal middle state. . Suppose a contrast is assumed in which the player is more advantageous if the advantageous interval transition processing is executed in the non-internal medium state than in the internal medium state. As described above, immediately after the setting value is changed (immediately after the game arcade opens), the non-internal medium state is entered. Therefore, in the above-described comparison, immediately after the opening of the amusement arcade is excessively advantageous, and the player's gambling tendencies are likely to be excessively stimulated. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

However, there is a case where the transition to the BB state is determined in the advantageous interval transition processing of the non-internal intermediate state. Specifically, when a reach win is won in a non-advantageous section in the non-internal middle state, a transition to the BB state is determined in the advantageous section transition processing. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the normal state can be determined in the processing when transitioning to the advantageous section in the non-internal intermediate state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that a high-probability transition lottery, which will be described later, is executed in the advantageous interval transition processing when transitioning from the non-advantageous interval to the normal state.

A special lottery is executed in each game in the Heaven Chance state. In the special lottery, it is decided by lottery whether or not to shift to the BB state. Although details will be described later, the special lottery is realized by each process including the judgment condition lottery process executed at the time of the third stop of the previous game, and the BB judgment process executed at the time of the start operation of the game this time. (See FIG. 15(a), which will be described later). Also, in the special lottery, transition to the BB state is determined with a higher probability than in the normal lottery (described later) executed in the pullback state and the normal state.

If the BB state is won in the Heaven Chance state, it is easier to shift to the Heaven state after the BB state is completed than in the case of winning the BB state in the pullback state or the normal state (the Heaven state is easily determined by the transfer lottery described later). . In other words, the heaven chance state is a state of putting out balls that is a chance to shift to the heaven state. When it is decided to shift to the BB state in the Heaven Chance state, the state shifts to the BB state from the next game (opportunity (D) in FIG. 13).

The Heaven Chance state ends when 98 games have been played without a decision to shift to the BB state. In the above case, the heaven chance state is shifted to the pullback state (timing (E) in FIG. 13(a)). Specifically, at the start of the heaven chance state, the initial value "98" is stored in the heaven chance counter. The heaven chance counter described above is provided in the main RAM 303, for example. In each game in the heaven chance state, the heaven chance counter is decremented by "1", and when the number reaches "0", the next game is shifted to the pullback state.

In each game in the pullback state, a normal lottery is executed. In the normal lottery, as in the special lottery in the heaven chance state, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the BB state. When the transition to the BB state is determined in the normal lottery, the game shifts to the BB state from the next game (opportunity (F) in FIG. 13(a)). In this embodiment, the transition to the BB state is more likely to be determined in the special lottery than in the normal lottery. For example, if Cherry (1, 2) wins, the special lottery will determine the transition to the BB state with a probability of about 27.3%. On the other hand, if Cherry (1, 2) wins, the normal lottery determines the transition to the BB state with a probability of about 2.4% on average.

By the way, since the non-advantageous section is a period in which the indication by the indication display 16 is not executed, there is a situation that some players tend to stop the game when the game shifts to the non-advantageous section. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, when a cherry is won in a non-advantageous section, the transition to the BB state is made easier than when a cherry is won in a normal state of an advantageous section. Specifically, the transition to the BB state is more likely to be decided in the special lottery in the non-advantageous section than in the normal lottery in the normal state. According to the present embodiment described above, there is an advantage that the inconvenience that the game is likely to be stopped in the non-advantageous section is suppressed.

A drop lottery is executed in each game in the pullback state. In the fall lottery described above, it is determined whether or not to shift to the normal state. When the falling lottery decides to shift to the normal state, the next game shifts to the normal state (opportunity (G) in FIG. 13(a)). In the falling lottery, for example, a transition to the normal state is determined with a probability of about 1/96.3. However, if the pullback state continues for a predetermined number of times (332 times or 234 times) without determining the shift to the normal state by the fall lottery, then the state shifts to the BB state (the trigger of FIG. 13(a) (H)).

For example, when the heaven chance state is started, the initial value "332" is set in the pullback ceiling counter. The pullback ceiling counter described above is provided in the main RAM 303, and is decremented by "1" in each game in the Heaven Chance state and the pullback state. It should be noted that the fall lottery described above is not executed in the Heaven Chance state. In the above configuration, when the heaven chance state (98 games) ends and the pullback state starts, the pullback ceiling counter is decremented to the numerical value "234". Therefore, when the drop lottery does not determine the transition to the normal state and the pullback state continues 234 times, then the state shifts to the BB state.

As noted above, there may be a direct transition from a non-advantageous segment to a pullback condition. In the above case, the pullback state is started without going through the Heaven Chance state. Therefore, the pullback ceiling counter remains at the initial value "332" when the pullback state is started. In the above case, if the drop lottery does not determine the transition to the normal state and the pullback state continues 332 times, then the state shifts to the BB state. In the above configuration, in the pull-back state that transitioned through the Heaven Chance state, compared with the pull-back state that transitioned without the Heaven Chance state, the pull-back ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0". migration is difficult to determine.

In the pullback state, a high-probability transition lottery is executed in the same manner as in the normal state, which will be described later. If you win in the high probability transition lottery, the high probability period will start. In the normal state of the high-probability period, the transition to the BB state is more likely to be determined in the normal lottery than in the period that is not the high-probability period (hereinafter referred to as the "low-probability period"). Specifically, a high-probability transition lottery is executed in a game in which a winning area (batting order plum, etc.) other than cherry and replay (1, 2) is won. In addition, in the game in which the bell is won, the transition to the high probability period is decided with a higher probability than in the game in which the other winning areas are won. In the game in which the ready-to-win wins (1 to 7) are won, the high-probability transition lottery is not executed because the transition to the BB state is determined. The high-probability transition lottery described above is executed in the processing at the time of stop described later.

Specifically, when winning the high-probability transition lottery, the initial value is set to the high-probability guarantee counter, and the high-probability period is started. The high probability guarantee counter is provided in the main RAM 303, for example. Also, the initial value of the high-probability guarantee counter is determined by lottery. In each game during the high probability period, the high probability guarantee counter is decremented by "1". In the high-probability period after the high-probability guarantee counter is decremented to the numerical value "0", a high-probability falling lottery is executed. In the high-probability drop lottery, it is determined by lottery whether or not to end the high-probability period (whether to transition to the low-probability period). When it is decided to end the high probability period, the game shifts to the low probability period from the next game. The high-probability falling lottery described above is executed in the starting process described later, regardless of the winning area.

In the normal state, as in the pullback state, normal lottery is executed in each game. It should be noted that the aspect of the effect executing means (liquid crystal display device 30, etc.) is common between the normal state and the pullback state. In addition, in the pullback state, it is not notified that the drop lottery has determined the transition to the normal state. Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the current ball-out state is the normal state or the pulled-back state from the aspect of the effect executing means. However, the normal state and the pullback state may be configured such that the execution frequency of the effect is different. Also, an effect may be provided that is not executed in the normal state but is executed in the pullback state.

When the normal lottery in the normal state determines the shift to the BB state, a pseudo game is executed in the next game to shift to the BB state (opportunity (I) in FIG. 13(a)). Also, in each game in the normal state, a high-probability transition lottery is executed in the same manner as in the pullback state described above. In the normal state during the high-probability period, the transition to the BB state is more likely to be determined in the normal lottery than in the low-probability period. In the high probability period of the normal state, the high probability fall lottery is executed in the same manner as in the high probability period of the pullback state.

When the normal state is started, the initial value "666" is set to the ceiling counter between BBs. In each game in the normal state, the ceiling counter between BBs is decremented by "1". When the ceiling counter between BBs is decremented to the numerical value "0", the next game is shifted to the BB state (opportunity (J) in FIG. 13(a)).

In this embodiment, the maximum number of games played from the end of the BB state to the transition to the normal state via the heaven chance state and pullback state is 332 times. In the above configuration, the ceiling counter between BBs (initial value is "666") is decremented to "0" before 998 games are executed after the end of the previous BB state, and a new BB state is entered. do. Further, the maximum number of games played from the transition from the non-advantageous section to the heaven chance state or pullback state to the transition to the normal state is 332 times. In the above configuration, after shifting from the non-advantageous section to the heaven chance state or pullback state, the ceiling counter between BBs is decremented to "0" before 998 games are executed, and the game shifts to the BB state.

The BB state is an instruction period during which an instruction on the instruction display 16 is executed. That is, in the BB state, a stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed. Specifically, in the BB state, when the above-mentioned specific group (excluding the one-piece winning combination) is won, a stop operation order is instructed in which a 6-pin plum combination or a 13-pin plum combination can be won. For example, in the BB state, if the batting order plum is won, the correct pushing order corresponding to the batting order plum is instructed. In addition, in the BB state, when the winning combination 1 of the ready-to-win game is won, the order of stop operation for winning the combination of 13 plums is instructed (see FIG. 15, which will be described later).

Although details will be described later, stock lottery processing is executed when the transition to the BB state is determined. Stock lottery processing is also executed in each game in the BB state. In the stock lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to give the 1G ream stock and the super heaven stock. When 1G ream stock is granted, the 1G ream stock counter is incremented. Also, when super heaven stock is given, the super heaven stock counter is incremented.

The BB state ends after a predetermined number of games have been played. The BB state of this embodiment ends after 50 games have been played. When the BB state ends, if the 1G consecutive stock counter has a numerical value of "1" or more, the numerical value "1" is subtracted from the 1G consecutive stock counter, a pseudo game is executed in the next game, and a new BB state is started. (Opportunity (K) in FIG. 13(a)). That is, the BB state continues until the value of the 1G ream stock counter becomes "0".

When the BB state ends, if the value of the 1G ream stock counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the value of the Super Heaven stock counter is greater than or equal to "1". If the value of the super heaven stock counter is greater than or equal to "1", the value "1" is subtracted from the super heaven stock counter to start the super heaven state from the next game (opportunity (L) in FIG. 13(a)). When the BB state ends, if both the 1G ream stock counter and the super heaven stock counter are "0", a transition lottery is executed.

FIG. 13(b) is a conceptual diagram of the transfer lottery table. The main CPU 301 uses the transition lottery table in the transition lottery to determine the ball output state to be shifted to next time. Specifically, one of the non-advantageous section, heaven chance state, and heaven state is determined in the shift lottery. As shown in FIG. 13(b), the transition lottery table is provided with lottery values for each ball-out state for each consecutive-chan mode. The consecutive chan mode includes "HI", "MID", and "LOW". In addition, it is easy to determine the transition to the heaven state in the order of ``HI'', ``MID'' and ``LOW'' in the continuous mode.

When the transition to the BB state is determined, the main CPU 301 determines one of the continuous-chance modes based on the current ball-out state and the winning area. Specifically, in the heaven chance state, the heaven state, and the super heaven state, it is easier to determine an advantageous consecutive-chan mode than in other ball-out states (normal state, etc.). In the above configuration, in the heaven chance state, the heaven state and the super heaven state, it is easier to shift to the heaven state after the BB state than in the other states. It should be noted that the processing for determining the continuous mode and the transition lottery described above are not disadvantageous due to the main penalty control described later.

Returning to FIG. 13(a). When the non-advantageous section is determined by the transition lottery, the transition to the non-advantageous section is made after the BB state ends (opportunity (M) in FIG. 13(a)). When the heaven chance state is determined by the transfer lottery, the state is shifted to the heaven chance state after the BB state is ended (opportunity (N) in FIG. 13(a)). When the state of heaven is determined by the transition lottery, the state is shifted to the state of heaven after the BB state ends (opportunity (O) in FIG. 13(a)).

In each game in the heaven state, it is determined by a special lottery whether or not to shift to the BB state as in the heaven chance state. However, in each game in the heaven state, the transition to the BB state may be determined more easily than in each game in the heaven chance state. When it is decided to shift to the BB state in the heaven state, a pseudo game is executed in the next game and the state shifts to the BB state (opportunity (P) in FIG. 13(a)).

Also, when the heaven state is started, the initial value "98" is set to the heaven ceiling counter. In each game in the heaven state, the heaven ceiling counter is decremented by "1", and when it reaches "0", the game shifts to the BB state (opportunity (Q) in FIG. 13(a)). In the heaven state described above, even if the transition to the BB state is not determined by a special lottery, it is possible to transition to the BB state after playing 98 games.

In each game in the super heaven state, as in the heaven state and the heaven chance state, it is determined by a special lottery whether or not to shift to the BB state. However, in each game in the Super Heaven state, the transition to the BB state may be determined more easily than in each game in the Heaven state and Heaven Chance state. When it is decided to shift to the BB state in the Super Heaven state, a pseudo game is executed in the next game to shift to the BB state (opportunity (R) in FIG. 13(a)).

Also, when the Super Heaven state is started, the initial value "32" is set to the Super Heaven ceiling counter. In each game in the super heaven state, the value of the super heaven ceiling counter is decremented by "1", and when the value reaches "0", the game shifts to the BB state (opportunity (S) in FIG. 13(a)). In the super heaven state described above, even if the transition to the BB state is not determined by lottery, it is possible to transition to the BB state after 32 games.

In the present embodiment, when a non-advantageous section transitions to an advantageous section, an initial value of "1350" is set to the advantageous section ceiling counter. The advantageous interval ceiling counter is decremented by "1" in each game of each ball output state (BB state, super heaven state, heaven state, heaven chance state, pullback state and normal state) in the advantageous interval. However, although the details will be described later, in the game in which the stopping operation is performed in an irregular pushing order during the non-instruction period of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ceiling counter is not decremented (penalty is given).

When the advantageous interval ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" in the normal state, the pullback state or the heaven chance state in the advantageous interval, the pseudo game is executed in the next game and the state shifts to the BB state (the trigger (a) in FIG. 13 (a) X)). As described above, when the advantageous interval starts, the advantageous interval counter is set to the initial value "1500", and the advantageous interval counter is decremented by "1" each time the advantageous interval is played. In the above configuration, if the stopping operation is not performed in the irregular pushing order during the non-instruction period (when no penalty is given), in the game where the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0", the advantageous section counter will be the numerical value "150". is subtracted up to That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 150 or less, it is possible to shift to the BB state.

When the advantageous interval ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" and the game shifts to the BB state, the advantageous interval counter becomes the numerical value "100" or less at the end of the BB state (50 games). In addition, in this embodiment, if the advantageous interval counter is equal to or less than "100" at the time the BB state ends, the transition to the non-advantageous interval is determined without executing the transition lottery (FIG. 13(a)). opportunity (Y)). Therefore, when the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" and the transition is made to the BB state, the transition is made to the non-advantageous section after the BB state ends.

When the advantageous interval ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" in the heaven state or the super heaven state in the advantageous interval, a pseudo-game is executed in the next game and the state shifts to the EDBB state (opportunity (Z) in FIG. 13(a)). . In other words, in the present embodiment described above, it is possible to shift to the EDBB state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 150 or less. In the pseudo-game when the EDD state starts, the symbol combination of "BAR-BAR-BAR" is displayed.

The EDBB state is the instruction period during which the instruction on the instruction display 16 is executed. Therefore, in the EDBB state, similarly to the BB state, when a specific group (see FIG. 8) is won, a stop operation order is instructed in which a 9-card combination can be won. The EDBB state ends when the advantageous interval counter reaches the numerical value "0". That is, the trigger for ending the EDBB state is the trigger for forcibly ending the advantageous section. Therefore, when the EDBB state ends, the vehicle shifts to the non-advantageous section (timing (T) in FIG. 13(a)).

For example, it is assumed that the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" in the heaven state and the state is shifted to the EDBB state. In the above case, in principle, the advantageous interval counter is the numerical value "150" at the start of the EDBB state. Therefore, the EDBB state continues for 150 games.

However, although the details will be described later, penalty control (main penalty control, sub-penalty control) may be executed in an advantageous section. In the game in which the above penalty control is executed, the update processing of various counters including the advantageous section ceiling counter is omitted (see FIG. 18(b-2) described later). In other words, the above penalty control substantially extends the number of games required to decrement the advantageous section ceiling counter to the numerical value "0". That is, when the penalty control is executed, the number of games played until the transition to the EDBB state is extended.

In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of penalty control, the advantageous section counter and the MY counter are updated. In the above configuration, when the penalty control is executed, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section at the time of transition to the EDBB state becomes smaller than when the penalty control is not executed. That is, when the penalty control is executed, the number of games in the EDBB state is substantially reduced.

The above penalty control is executed when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order during the non-instruction period. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment is configured to be capable of executing an irregular pushing notification when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order. According to the above configuration, the player is suggested that the penalty control has been executed by the irregular pushing notification.

FIG. 13(c) is a diagram for explaining the presence/absence of penalty control and the presence/absence of irregular push notification in each ball-out state. As shown in FIG. 13(c), in the non-instruction period (normal state, etc.) of the advantageous section, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order, the irregular push notification is executed and the penalty control is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 13(c), during the instructed period (BB state, etc.) of the advantageous section, even if the stopping operation is performed in an irregular pushing order, the irregular pushing notification is not executed and the penalty control is not executed.

Specifically, when a specific group (batting order plum, etc.) wins during the instruction period, the instruction display 16 instructs the stop operation order. In this embodiment, the penalty control is not executed when the stopping operation is performed in accordance with the instruction from the instruction display 16 in an irregular pushing order. Also, in a game in which the stop operation order is instructed by the instruction display 16, even if the stop operation is performed in a pushing order (including an irregular pushing order) that does not follow the instruction, the penalty control is not executed. Also, in a game in which the specific group is not won during the instruction period (a game in which the instruction is not executed), even if the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the penalty control is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 13(c), penalty control is not executed in the non-advantageous section. Specifically, in the non-advantageous section, in the game in which the advantageous section transition processing is not executed, as described above, the processing related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 is not executed at all (all parameters are not updated from the initial values). . Further, in the game in which the advantageous interval transition processing is executed in the non-advantageous interval, the advantageous interval transition processing is common between the case of the stop operation in the irregular pressing order and the case of the left first stop operation. However, if the stopping operation is performed in an irregular push order in the non-advantageous section, an irregular push notification is executed.

Let us assume a contrast ratio in which the irregular push notification is executed during the non-instruction period of the advantageous section and the irregular push notification is not executed during the non-advantageous section. In the above comparison, a period during which the instruction of the instruction display 16 is not executed and a period during which the irregular push notification is not executed are provided. Therefore, some players may be confused as to whether or not the penalty control is executed when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order during the non-instruction period. In this embodiment, since the irregular pushing notification is executed even in the non-advantageous section, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed compared to, for example, the comparison.

14(a) and 14(b) are conceptual diagrams of each instruction determination table (A, B). In each game, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number from the instruction determination table, and displays instruction information (“01” to “04”) corresponding to the instruction number on the instruction display 16 . Further, the main CPU 301 transmits a command (second command described later) indicating the instruction number determined for each game to the sub-control board 400 (sub-CPU 412).

Each instruction determination table includes an instruction determination table A (FIG. 14(a)) and an instruction determination table B (FIG. 14(b)). The instruction determination table A is used to determine the instruction number for each game during the non-instruction period (normal state, etc.). Also, the instruction determination table B is used to determine the instruction number of each game during the instruction period (BB state, etc.). As shown in FIG. 14, each instruction determination table includes instruction numbers for each winning area.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the instruction number "99" is determined regardless of which winning area wins during the non-instruction period. When the instruction number "99" is determined, the instruction display 16 does not display the instruction information. Specifically, when the instruction number "99" is determined, the instruction display 16 displays the number "0" during the period of displaying the instruction information. According to the above configuration, the stop operation mode is not instructed by the instruction display 16 during the non-instruction period.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when the plum LC (1, 2) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "01". When the instruction number "01" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "1" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "1") as instruction information. As described above, when the plum LC(1, 2) is won, the correct pressing order of the correct plums is "left, middle, right". In the above configuration, in a game in which instruction information "1" is displayed, stopping operations in the order of "left, center, right" is more advantageous than stopping in another order. Therefore, when the instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "left, middle, right". In other words, the above configuration instructs the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "left, center, right" by displaying the instruction information "1".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when the plum LR (1, 2) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "02". When the instruction number "02" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "2" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "2"") as instruction information. As described above, when the plum LR (1, 2) is won, the correct pressing order of the correct plum is "left and right middle". In the above configuration, in a game in which the instruction information "2" is displayed, stopping operations in the order of "center left and right" are more advantageous than stopping operations in other orders. Therefore, when the instruction information "2" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "left and right middle". In other words, the above configuration instructs the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "center left and right" by displaying the instruction information "2".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when plum L(1,2) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 outputs the instruction number "01" is determined, and the number "1" (instruction information "1") is displayed on the instruction display 16 as the instruction information. As described above, when plum L (1, 2) is won, if the stop operation is performed with the left 1st (including the pressing order of "left, middle, right"), the correct plum wins, and is more advantageous than stopping with an irregular pressing order. Become. In the present embodiment, the instruction information "1" is displayed in the game during the instruction period in which the plum L(1,2) is won, and the stop operation order of "left center right" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which the plum L(1, 2) was won, the stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when plum L (3, 4) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 outputs the instruction number "02" is determined, and the number "2" (instruction information "2") is displayed on the instruction display 16 as the instruction information. As described above, when plum L (3, 4) is won, if the stop operation is performed on the left 1st (including the pressing order of "right and left center"), the correct plum will win, and it will be more advantageous than the stopping operation with an irregular pressing order. . In this embodiment, the instruction information "2" is displayed in the game during the instruction period in which the plum L (3, 4) is won, and the stop operation order of "left and right center" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which the plum L(3, 4) is won, the stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when the plum CL (1 to 4) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "03". When the instruction number "03" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "3" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "3"") as instruction information. As described above, when the plum CL (1 to 4) is won, the correct pressing order of the correct plums is "middle left and right". In the above configuration, in a game in which instruction information "3" is displayed, stopping operations in the order of "middle left and right" are more advantageous than stopping operations in other orders. Therefore, when the instruction information "3" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "middle left and right". In other words, the above configuration instructs the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "middle left and right" by displaying the instruction information "3".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when plum CR (1 to 4) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "04". When the instruction number "04" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "4" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "4"") as instruction information. As described above, when the plum CR (1 to 4) is won, the correct pressing order of the correct plums is "middle right left". In the above configuration, in a game in which instruction information "4" is displayed, stopping operations in the order of "middle, right, left" is more advantageous than stopping in other orders. Therefore, when the instruction information "4" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "middle, right, left". In other words, the above configuration instructs the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "middle, right, left" by displaying the instruction information "4".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when the plum RL (3 to 6) is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "05". When the instruction number "05" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "5" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "5"") as instruction information. As described above, when the plum RL (3 to 6) is won, the correct pressing order of the correct plums is "right, left, middle". In the above configuration, in a game in which instruction information "5" is displayed, stopping operations in the order of "right, left, middle" is more advantageous than stopping in another order. Therefore, when the instruction information "5" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "right, left, middle". In other words, the above configuration instructs the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "right, left, middle" by displaying the instruction information "5".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when the plum RC3 is won in each game during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "06". When the instruction number "06" is determined, the main CPU 301 causes the instruction display 16 to display the number "6" (hereinafter referred to as "instruction information "6") as instruction information. As described above, when plum RC3 is won, the correct pressing order of the correct plums is "right middle left". In the above configuration, in a game in which instruction information "6" is displayed, stopping operations in the order of "left in right" is more advantageous than stopping in other orders. Therefore, when the instruction information "6" is displayed on the instruction display 16, the player performs the stop operation in the order of "left in right". In other words, the above configuration instructs the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "left in right" by displaying the instruction information "6".

As shown in FIG. 14(b), during the instruction period of the internal medium state, when plum CL (5, 6) is won, the main CPU 301 issues an instruction in the same manner as when plum CL (1-4) is won. Determine the number "03". Also, during the instruction period of the internal intermediate state, when plum CR (5, 6) is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "04" in the same manner as when plum CR (1 to 4) is won. Furthermore, during the instruction period of the internal intermediate state, when plum RL (1, 2) is won, the main CPU 301 determines the instruction number "05" in the same way as when plum RL (3 to 6) is won. During the instruction period of the internal middle state, when plum RC (1, 2) is won, the main CPU 301 determines an instruction number "06" in the same way as when plum RC3 is won.

In the above configuration, if plum CL (5, 6), plum CR (5, 6), plum RL (1, 2) or plum RC (1, 2) wins in the internal middle state, the displayed instruction information By performing the stop operation in the order of , the correct plum will win a prize. However, as described above, if Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2) or Plum RC (1, 2) is elected in a non-internal state, any stop Even if it is the operation order, the correct plum cannot win a prize. In consideration of the above circumstances, the main CPU 301 determines that plum CL (5, 6), plum CR (5, 6), plum RL (1, 2) or plum RC (1, 2) is won in the non-internal state. If so, the instruction number "00" is determined and the instruction information is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in each game during the instruction period, when the winning combination (1, 2) is won, the main CPU 301 instructs The number "04" is determined and the instruction information "4" is displayed. As described above, when the reach roll (1, 2) is won, the stop operation in the irregular pushing order (including the "middle right left" pushing order) wins the correct plum, and is more advantageous than the left 1st stop operation. Become. In the present embodiment, in the game during the instruction period in which the ready-to-win win (1, 2) is won, the instruction information "4" is displayed, and the stop operation order of "middle right left" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which the ready-to-win win (1, 2) is won, the order of stop operation advantageous to the player is instructed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in each game during the instruction period, when the ready-to-win combination (3 to 5) is won, the main CPU 301 outputs instruction number "06" in the same manner as when the plum RC3 is won. It determines and displays the instruction information "6". As mentioned above, if the reach roll (3 to 5) is won, the correct plum will be awarded if the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (including the pressing order of "right center left"), which is more advantageous than the stop operation on the left 1st. become. In the present embodiment, in the game during the instruction period in which the ready-to-win wins (3 to 5) are won, the instruction information "6" is displayed and the stop operation order of "left in right" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which the ready-to-win winning combination (3 to 5) is won, the stop operation order advantageous to the player is instructed.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in each game during the instruction period, when the ready-to-win combination (6, 7) is won, the main CPU 301 instructs The number "05" is determined and the instruction information "5" is displayed. As described above, when the ready-to-win win 6 is won, the right 1st stop operation (including the pressing order of "right, left, middle") wins the correct plum, which is more advantageous than the left 1st or middle 1st stop operation. Also, when the ready-to-win combination 7 is won, the stop operation in the irregular pushing order (including the pushing order of "right, left, middle") wins the correct plum, which is more advantageous than the stop operation in the left 1st. In the present embodiment, in the game during the instruction period in which the ready-to-win win (6, 7) is won, the instruction information "5" is displayed, and the stop operation order of "right, left, middle" is instructed. That is, in the game during the instruction period in which the ready-to-win win (6, 7) is won, the order of stop operation advantageous to the player is instructed.

14(c) is a schematic diagram of the segment display D. FIG. The segment indicator D is configured including the indicator indicator 16 described above. The indicator display 16 is a single digit seven segment display. FIG. 14(c) illustrates an indication indicator 16 that displays indication information "1". As shown in FIG. 14(c), the segment display D includes an advantageous section display 38. FIG. The advantageous section indicator 38 is turned ON (lights up) in the advantageous section. As described above, each instruction period (BB state, EDBB state) is included in the advantageous interval. Therefore, during the indication period in which the indication information is displayed on the indication indicator 16, the advantageous section indicator 38 lights up.

FIG. 14(d) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the advantageous section indicator 38 lights up. FIG. 14(d) shows the ball output state (non-advantageous section, advantageous section) at each time point, the lighting state of the advantageous section indicator 38 (lights off, lit), and each game (... n-1th game, nth , n+1th game, etc.) are shown.

In the specific example of FIG. 14(d), it is assumed that the transition to the advantageous section is decided in the "n"th game. That is, it is assumed that the advantageous section transition process is executed in the "n"th game. In the above case, the non-advantageous section is up to the "n"th game, and the game after the "n+1"th game is the advantageous section. FIG. 14(d) shows the start time ts (when the start lever 24 is operated) and the end time te (when the third stop is made) of the "n"th game.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), the advantageous section indicator 38 of the present embodiment lights up when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section. Specifically, the advantageous interval indicator 38 lights up from the start operation of the game in which the advantageous interval transition processing is executed. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14D, the advantageous section indicator 38 lights up in advance from the non-advantageous section immediately before the start of the advantageous section. Note that the timing for lighting the advantageous section indicator 38 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the advantageous interval indicator 38 may be illuminated at the time when the game in which the advantageous interval transition processing is executed ends (time te in the specific example of FIG. 14(d)). Further, the advantageous section indicator 38 may be illuminated at the time when the instruction indicator 16 first executes the instruction. Furthermore, immediately after the pseudo-game ends (after "seven-seven-seven" is displayed, before the stop operation becomes effective), the advantageous section indicator 38 may be lit.

FIG. 15A is a diagram for explaining each command (first command, second command) transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 412. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the main CPU 301 transmits a first command (such as "A00") to the sub CPU 412 according to the winning area. For example, if the winning area of the current game is a loss, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “A00” to the sub CPU 412 . Further, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A01" when the replay 1 is won, the command "A02" when the replay 2 is won, and the command "A03" when the replay 3 is won. .

The main CPU 301 of the present embodiment determines that a winning area belonging to a specific group has been won, and transmits a common first command when either the batting order plum or the single hand (1 to 4) is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls plum L (1, 2), plum L (3, 4), plum LC (1, 2), plum LR (1, 2), plum CL (1-4), plum CR(1-4), Plum CL(5,6), Plum CR(5,6), Plum RL(1,2), Plum RC(1,2), Plum RL(3-6) and Plum RC3( The command "A04" is commonly transmitted regardless of which of the batting order plums wins. Also, when the single-card combination (1 to 4) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A04" in the same manner as when the batting order plum is won.

The main CPU 301 transmits a command "A05" when Cherry 1 is won. Similarly, when a duplicate win 1 (Cherry 1+RBB) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits a command “A05”. In addition, the main CPU 301 transmits a command "A06" when Cherry 2 is won. Similarly, when a duplicate win 2 (cherry 2+RBB) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits a command "A06". The main CPU 301 transmits a command "A07" when the bell is won. Similarly, when the double combination 3 (Bell+RBB) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A07".

The main CPU 301 transmits a command “A08” when the winning combination (1, 2) is won. Similarly, when a duplicate combination (4, 5) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits a command "A08". The main CPU 301 transmits the command “A09” when the ready-to-win wins (3 to 5) are won. Similarly, when a duplicate combination (6 to 8) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits a command "A09". The main CPU 301 transmits the command "A10" when the winning combination (6, 7) is won. Similarly, when the double combination (9, 10) is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A10". Also, when the RBB is won, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "A00" in the same manner as when the loss is determined.

When receiving the above first command, the sub CPU 412 determines various effects according to the first command. For example, when the command "A01" for winning Replay 1 is received, the sub CPU 412 determines an effect to notify that Replay 1 has been won.

In addition to the first command, the main CPU 301 transmits to the sub CPU 412 a second command (such as "B01") corresponding to the instruction number (instruction information) of the current game. Specifically, when the instruction number “99” (no instruction) is determined in the current game, the main CPU 301 transmits the command “B99” to the sub CPU 412 as shown in FIG. 15(a). As described above, the instruction number "99" is determined in each game during the non-instruction period. Therefore, during the non-instruction period, the command "B99" is transmitted in each game.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the main CPU 301 selects plum L (1, 2) or plum LC (1, 2) during the instruction period and selects the instruction number "01" (left, middle, right order). When determined, the command "B01" is transmitted. Further, when plum L (3, 4) or plum LR (1, 2) is won during the instruction period and the instruction number "02" (in the order of left and right) is determined, the main CPU 301 issues the command "B02". Send. Further, when the plum CL (1 to 6) is won and the instruction number "03" (in the middle left and right order) is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits the command "B03" and the plum CR (1 to 6) is won. Then, when the instruction number "04" (in the middle, right, left order) is determined, the command "B04" is transmitted. Similarly, when plums RL (1-6) win and instruction number "05" (in the order of right, left, middle) is determined, the main CPU 301 transmits command "B05" and plums RC (1-3) If the lottery wins and the instruction number "06" (in the order of right, center, left) is determined, the command "B06" is transmitted.

However, as described above, if Plum CL (5, 6), Plum CR (5, 6), Plum RL (1, 2) or Plum RC (1, 2) is elected in a non-internal state, any stop Even if it is the operation order, the correct plum cannot win a prize. In consideration of the above circumstances, the main CPU 301 determines that plum CL (5, 6), plum CR (5, 6), plum RL (1, 2) or plum RC (1, 2) is won in the non-internal state. If so, the instruction number "00" is determined and the command "B99" is transmitted.

In the instruction period, when the ready-to-win combination (1, 2) is won and the instruction number "04" (in the order of middle left and right) is determined, the main CPU 301 performs the same operation as when the plum CR (1 to 6) is won. , to send the command “B04”. Similarly, when the main CPU 301 wins the reach wins (3 to 5) and determines the command number "06" (in the order of right, center, left) during the command period, the plum RC (1 to 3) wins. As in the case above, the command "B06" is transmitted. In addition, during the instruction period, the main CPU 301 determines whether the ready-to-win hands (6, 7) are won and the instruction number "05" (in the order of right and left) is won, and when the plum RL (1 to 6) is won. Similarly, the command "B05" is transmitted.

When the above second command is received by the sub CPU 412, the sub CPU 412 determines an instruction effect for instructing the stop operation order of the instruction number specified by the second command. In the instruction effect, for example, the liquid crystal display device 30 instructs the stop operation order that is the same as the stop operation order indicated by the instruction information. As described above, the second command transmitted during the non-instruction period is only the command "B99" (no instruction). Therefore, in the non-instruction period, in principle, the instruction effect is not executed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed to instruct a stop operation order that does not affect the payout rate (the effect is small).

By the way, it is assumed that the first command of the batting order plum is not grouped. In the above configuration, the correct pressing order of the batting order plum is substantially grasped from the first command (type of batting order plum). Therefore, in this configuration, by obtaining the first command by an illegal means (for example, an illegal board), it is assumed that a fraudulent act of specifying the correct pushing order of the batting order plum is assumed. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the first command for each plumb in the batting order is common (grouped). According to the present embodiment described above, since the type of batting order plum (correct hitting order) cannot be specified from the first command, there is an advantage that the above-described cheating is suppressed.

However, in a game in which a specific group wins, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out is greater when the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order than when the left first stop operation is performed. Therefore, even if the first command of each winning area of a specific group is grouped, if the first command is obtained illegally and it is specified from the first command that the specific group has won, the game will be played in an irregular order. There is room for cheating. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment adopts a configuration that suppresses the above fraudulent acts.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in a game in which a specific group wins (hereinafter “group expected value B”) is the specified number ( 3 sheets). The group expected value B is obtained by Equation 2 below.

In this embodiment, the group expected value B in order 1 (left, middle, right) may be described as "group expected value B1." Similarly, the group expected value B in the order 2 (left-right center) to the group expected value B in the order 6 (right-center left) may be described as "group expected value B2" to "group expected value B6". "m" in Equation 2 indicates an integer from "1" to "6" (same as Equation 1 above). Also, "n" in Equation 2 means the group number n (similar to Equation 1 above). As described above, the specific group is the winning areas of group numbers 1 to 12 (see FIG. 10(a)).

"Hnm" in Equation 2 means the number of payouts that can be awarded when the stop operation is performed in order m in a game in which the winning area of group number n has been won (same as Equation 1 above). In addition, "Pbnm" in Equation 2 means the probability of attracting a winning combination in a game in which the winning area of group number n has been won and the stop operation is performed in order m (similar to Equation 1 above). "Pcn" in Equation 2 means the probability that the winning area of group number n is won when a specific group is won. In other words, the probability Pcn means the ratio of the winning area of the group number n to the winning area of the specific group. For example, when the set value is "2", the sum of the lottery values (see FIG. 5 described above) for each winning area in the specific group is "53871". Also, for example, the lottery value (total value) of plums L (1 to 4) of group number 1 is “4596” (1149×4). Therefore, the probability Pc1 (n=1) is "4596/53871".

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the group expected value B. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the group expected value B (1 to 6) may change between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Specifically, in the internal center state, the group expected value B1 for "left center right" and the group expected value B2 for "left center right" of the left 1st are both approximately "1.36". In the non-internal medium state, the group expected value B1 and the expected value B2 are both approximately "1.36" in the same manner as in the internal medium state.

As shown in FIG. 15B, in the internal middle state, the group expected value B (3 to 6) is about "2.8" regardless of the stop operation order among the irregular pushing orders. On the other hand, in the non-internal intermediate state, the group expected value B (3 to 6) is about "1.8" regardless of the stop operation order among the irregular pushing orders. The reason why the group expected value B (3-6) is smaller in the non-internal medium state than in the internal medium state is the same as the acquisition expected value A (3-6) is smaller in the non-internal medium state than in the internal medium state. This is the reason (see FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b)). Specifically, among the specific groups, the group expected values B(3 to 6) are smaller in the non-internal medium state than in the internal medium state in plum CL (5, 6), plum CR (5, 6), plum This is because if RL (1, 2) and plum RC (1, 2) win in the non-internal state, the correct plum does not win.

As described above, the group expected value B is smaller than the prescribed number of 3 sheets in any stop operation order. Also, the group expected value B is smaller than the prescribed number of 3 in any gaming state. In the above configuration, compared to the configuration in which the group expected value B can be larger than 3 cards depending on the stop operation order or the game state, the effect of suppressing the above-described cheating using the first command is particularly remarkable. is.

However, since the type of the winning area cannot be specified with the grouped first commands, there may be an inconvenience that the effects that can be determined based on the first commands lack interest. For example, the above inconvenience is likely to occur when the first commands of all the winning areas (batting order plums, reach targets) in which the correct plum can win a prize are grouped.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, among the winning areas in which the correct plum can win, the first commands of the plums in the batting order (Plum L, etc.) are grouped, while the reach numbers (1 to 7) are grouped. The first command adopts a configuration that does not group. With the above configuration, it is possible to determine the effect depending on whether or not the ready-to-win combination has been won and the type of the winning ready-to-win combination.

However, in a game in which a ready-to-win combination (1 to 7) is won, a correct plum can be won in a stop operation order according to the type of the ready-to-win combination (type of the first command). Therefore, if the first command of the reach target is not grouped, a new problem may arise that the above-described fraudulent act using the first command is not appropriately suppressed. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment employs a configuration capable of solving the problem. The above configuration will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 15(c).

FIG. 15(c) is a diagram for explaining when the combination of the first command and the second command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 15(c), during the instruction period, each command is transmitted substantially at the same time as the game start operation (immediately after the start operation). In the above configuration, the sub-CPU 412 side can specify the correct pressing order of the batting order plum before the stop operation becomes possible during the instruction period. During the instruction period, the sub CPU 412 determines and enables execution of an instruction effect of notifying the correct keystroke sequence specified from the second command before the stop operation becomes possible.

On the other hand, during the non-instruction period, a combination of the first command and the second command is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 substantially simultaneously with the first stop operation (immediately after the first stop operation). With the above configuration, the sub CPU 412 can determine an effect according to the first command (winning area) after the first stop operation. For example, it is possible to make different effect lottery tables (tables that define the types of effects that can be executed and the probability that each effect is determined) to be referred to in games in which the batting order plum is won and in games in which the ready-to-win combination is won. can. In addition, the effect lottery table to be referred to by the game in which the reach wins (1, 2) are won, the game in which the reach wins (3 to 5) are won, and the game in which the reach wins (6, 7) are won. can differ.

Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 10(a), in a game in which a winning combination (1 to 7) is won, whether or not the correct plum (13-card plum combination) wins is determined by the first stop operation. determined by the selected stop button 25. Specifically, in a game in which a reach win (1 to 5) is won, the correct plum wins in the middle 1st or the right 1st. In the game in which the ready-to-win win 6 is won, the correct plum wins in the right 1st, and in the game in which the ready-to-win win 7 wins, the correct plum wins in the middle 1st or right 1st. With the above configuration, in a game in which the win of the ready-to-win combination is made, whether or not the correct plum wins does not change depending on the pressing order after the first stop operation.

As can be understood from the above description, the first command (ready-to-win) transmitted after the first stop operation specifies the subsequent advantageous stop operation order (second stop operation, third stop operation). not a thing Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress (invalidate) the above-described fraudulent act using the first command of reach. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the non-instruction period, the first command of the ready-to-win target is not grouped and is transmitted at the time of the first stop operation. Fraudulent actions using the first command can be suppressed.

The main CPU 301 calculates various game information (consecutive role ratio, role ratio, latest consecutive role ratio, latest role ratio, instructed role ratio, bonus game ratio) according to the progress of the game, and The display information corresponding to is displayed on the main display 40 . In order to calculate the above game information, the main CPU 301 counts the number of games during the period from when the gaming machine 1 is first turned on until the number of games reaches 175,000 (hereinafter referred to as "total game counting period"). do.

FIG. 16A is a diagram for explaining each storage area (G1 to G3, g1, g2) of the main RAM 303. FIG. Each of the above storage areas is provided for storing each of the above-described game information (consecutive play ratio, etc.), and includes storage area G1, storage area G2, storage area G3, storage area G4, storage area g1, and storage area g2. include. For example, each storage area can store one byte of information.

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the period in which the so-called "accessory continuous operation device for the first class special award" operates may be simply referred to as "the first party". Similarly, the period in which the so-called "accessory continuous operation device for the second type special award" operates may be simply referred to as "second party". The payout of a predetermined number of medals is completed for the first winning party and the second winning party. Also, the period during which the so-called "class 1 special role item" operates is simply referred to as "during the first role", and the period during which the so-called "second type special role item" operates is simply referred to as "during the second role". may be described as The game ends after eight games during the first role, and ends after one game during the second role. In addition, the period during which the so-called "ordinary role" operates may be described as "ordinary role". During the ordinary accessory, the game ends after one game.

The bonus operating state of the present embodiment is during the first role, and all games are during the first role. In addition, you may provide "in the 1st role general" in the 1st role group. In the 1st combination general combination, a winning combination (RB combination) that activates the first type special combination is more likely to be won than in a game state other than the 1st combination combination general. In addition, when the second party is provided, the second party may be provided with "general second party". In the 2nd combination general combination, the winning combination (CB combination) that activates the 2nd type special combination is more likely to be won than in the game state other than the 2nd combination combination general.

Consecutive role ratio is the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as "total number of medals A") acquired from the time the power is first turned on to the present (hereinafter referred to as "total game period"), among the first role is the ratio of the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as "the number of consecutive medals B") occupied by the number of medals (including the first accessory of ) (consecutive combination ratio = B/A). The number of consecutive medals B in this embodiment is the number of medals acquired in the bonus operation state (in the first accessory of the first party). As shown in FIG. 16(a), the concatenation ratio is stored in the storage area G1.

The main CPU 301 calculates the combination ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G1. If the calculation result contains a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the concatenation ratio in the storage area G1.

Accessory ratio is the ratio of the total number of medals obtained in the first accessory, the second accessory, and the normal accessory (hereinafter referred to as "the number of accessory medals C") to the total number of medals A. Yes (character ratio = C/A). As shown in FIG. 16(a), the character product ratio is stored in the storage area G2. Since the number of accessory medals C in this embodiment is not provided during the second accessory and during the normal accessory, it is the number of medals obtained during the first accessory (bonus operation state).

The main CPU 301 calculates the role product ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G2. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the role product ratio in the storage area G2. The instruction-inclusive accessory ratio is the total number of medals (C+D) obtained by the total number of medals obtained in the game for which the instruction display 16 instructed the pushing order (hereinafter referred to as "the number of instructed game medals D") and the number of accessory medals C. is the ratio of the total number of medals A (indicated accessory ratio = (C + D) / A).

The instruction game medal count D in the present embodiment described above can also be rephrased as the total number of medals obtained in the game during the instruction period in which the specific group has won. In the present embodiment, in a game in which the instruction display 16 indicates the pressing order, even if the stop operation is performed in a game other than the pressing order (when the pressing order is missed), the one-piece combination can be stopped and displayed. In the above case, the numerical value "1" is added to the number D of the instructed game medals.

The main CPU 301 calculates the instructed accessory ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G3. If the calculation result includes a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the instructed accessory ratio in the storage area G3. In the game in which the specific group wins during the non-instruction period, the main CPU 301 transmits to the sub CPU 412 a first command indicating that the irregular pushing order is one-sidedly advantageous. However, even if medals are given in the above game, the instructed game medal number D is not added.

The most recent combination ratio is the number of medals won in the most recent 6000 games (hereinafter referred to as "the most recent total number of medals a"), among the first role (including the first role of the first party) is the ratio of the number of medals acquired in (hereinafter referred to as “number of most recent consecutive medals b”) (most recent consecutive combination ratio = b/a). The number b of the most recent consecutive medals in this embodiment is the number of medals obtained in the bonus operation state (in the first accessory of the first party) in the most recent 6000 games. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the latest combination ratio is stored in the storage area g1. When the number of games played in the total game period is 6000 or less, the consecutive combination ratio and the latest consecutive combination ratio are the same (B/A=b/a).

The main CPU 301 calculates the latest combination ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area g1. If the calculation result contains a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the latest combination ratio in the storage area g1.

The latest accessory ratio is the sum of the number of medals obtained in the first accessory, the second accessory, and the normal accessory (hereinafter referred to as "the number of accessory medals c"), out of the latest total number of medals a. ratio (character ratio = c/a). Since the number of accessory medals c in this embodiment is not provided during the second accessory and during the normal accessory, it is the number of medals obtained during the first accessory (bonus operation state) in the most recent 6000 games. Become. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the latest role product ratio is stored in the storage area g2. When the number of games played in the total game period is 6000 or less, the role ratio and the latest role ratio match (C/A=c/a).

The main CPU 301 calculates the latest role product ratio every 400 games, and stores the calculation result in the storage area g2. If the calculation result contains a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the latest role product ratio in the storage area g2.

The bonus game ratio is, out of the total number of games E in the total game period, the number of games played in the first role (including the first role), the number of games played in the second role (including the second role), The bonus game count F, which is the sum of the number of games played during the first role (excluding the first role), the number of games played during the second role (excluding the second role), and the number of games played during the normal role percentage (bonus game ratio=F/E). The bonus game frequency F in this embodiment is the total number of games in the bonus operation state.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), the bonus game ratio is stored in the memory area G4. The main CPU 301 calculates the bonus game ratio for each game, and stores the calculation result in the storage area G4. If the calculation result contains a decimal part, the main CPU 301 discards the decimal part and stores only the integer part as the bonus game ratio in the storage area G4.

The total number of medals A, the number of consecutive medals B, the number of accessory medals C, the number of instructed game medals D, the total number of games E, the number of bonus games F, the latest total number of medals a, the number of latest consecutive medals b and accessories The number of medals c is separately stored in a dedicated counter provided in the main RAM 303, and is added at each of the above-described triggers. For example, when medals are given in each game in which the instruction is executed, the instructed game medal number D is added. Also, when medals are given in the bonus operation state, the number of accessory medals C is added. Furthermore, when game media are provided in each game, the total number of medals A is added regardless of the presence or absence of the stop operation order instruction.

In this embodiment, when the total number of games E reaches 175,000 times, updating of the combination ratio, the role ratio, the instructed role ratio, and the bonus game ratio is stopped. On the other hand, the latest combination ratio and the latest accessory ratio are also updated in the period after the total number of games E reaches 175000 times.

FIG. 16(b-1) is a schematic diagram of the main display 40 displaying the display information HA. When the display information HA is displayed, the first display portion 40X of the main display 40 displays the character string "6A" corresponding to the combination ratio, and the second display portion 40Y displays the current value of the storage area G1. (magnitude of concatenated ratio) is displayed.

When the display information HA is displayed and the ratio information of the second display unit 40Y is greater than or equal to the number "60" (G1≧60), the second display unit 40Y blinks the ratio information. When the display information HA is displayed and the number of games played during the total game period is less than 17500, the first display section 40X blinks the identification information.

FIG. 16(b-2) is a schematic diagram of the main display 40 displaying the display information HB. When the display information HB is displayed, the character string "7A" corresponding to the character ratio is displayed on the first display portion 40X of the main display 40, and the current value of the storage area G2 is displayed on the second display portion 40Y. is displayed.

When the display information HB is displayed and the ratio information of the second display unit 40Y is greater than or equal to the number "70" (G2≧70), the second display unit 40Y blinks the ratio information. When the display information HB is displayed and the number of games played during the total game period is less than 17500, the first display section 40X blinks the identification information.

FIG. 16(b-3) is a schematic diagram of the main display 40 displaying the display information HC. When the display information HC is displayed, the character string "7P" corresponding to the instructed role item ratio is displayed on the first display portion 40X of the main display 40, and the character string "7P" corresponding to the instructed role item ratio is displayed on the second display portion 40Y. Current value is displayed.

When the display information HC is displayed and the ratio information of the second display unit 40Y is greater than or equal to the number "70" (G3≧70), the second display unit 40Y blinks the ratio information. When the display information HC is displayed and the number of games played during the total game period is less than 175000 (E<175000), the first display section 40X blinks the identification information.

FIG. 16(b-4) is a schematic diagram of the main display 40 displaying the display information HD. When the display information HD is displayed, the first display portion 40X of the main display 40 displays the character string "6Y" corresponding to the latest combination ratio, and the second display portion 40Y displays the current value of the storage area g1. value is displayed.

When the display information HD is displayed and the ratio information of the second display unit 40Y is greater than or equal to the number "60" (g1≧60), the second display unit 40Y blinks the ratio information. When the display information HD is displayed and the number of games played during the total game period is less than 6000, the first display section 40X blinks the identification information.

FIG. 16(b-5) is a schematic diagram of the main display 40 displaying the display information HE. When the display information HE is displayed, the first display portion 40X of the main display 40 displays the character string "7Y" corresponding to the latest role product ratio, and the second display portion 40Y displays the current value of the storage area g2. value is displayed.

When the display information HE is displayed and the ratio information of the second display unit 40Y is greater than or equal to the number "70" (g2≧70), the second display unit 40Y blinks the ratio information. When the display information HE is displayed and the number of games played during the total game period is less than 6000, the first display section 40X blinks the identification information.

FIG. 16(b-6) is a schematic diagram of the main display 40 displaying the display information HF. When the display information HF is displayed, the character string "5F" corresponding to the bonus game ratio is displayed on the first display portion 40X of the main display 40, and the current value of the storage area G4 is displayed on the second display portion 40Y. is displayed.

When the display information HF is displayed and the ratio information of the second display unit 40Y is greater than or equal to the number "50" (G4≧50), the second display unit 40Y blinks the ratio information. When the display information HF is displayed and the number of games played during the total game period is less than 175000, the first display section 40X blinks the identification information.

As described above, the above display information is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (approximately 5 seconds). Specifically, when the main display 40 is powered on, the test pattern is displayed for about 5 seconds. In the above test pattern, all the segments of the main display 40 blink. After that, the main display 40 displays the display information HC, the display information HD, the display information HE, the display information HA, the display information HB, and the display information HF in this order for about 5 seconds each. After displaying the display information HF, each display information is repeatedly displayed from the beginning (from the display information HC).

In addition to the period immediately after the power is turned on, the main display 40 may be configured to display the test pattern during other periods as well. For example, the main display 40 may be configured to display a test pattern during a period in which the setting value can be changed. Also, the main display 40 may be configured to display a test pattern during the period in which the set values can be checked. Note that the test pattern may be different between the period immediately after the power is turned on and the other period.

<Each data used by the sub CPU>
Various data stored in the sub ROM 413 will be described below with reference to the drawings. The sub ROM 413 stores various data including a notification effect determination table.

When the sub CPU 412 receives a second command (other than B99 (no instruction)) indicating an instruction number (instruction information), the sub CPU 412 determines one of the notification effects using the notification effect determination table. When the notification effect is determined, the sub CPU 412 transmits an effect control command indicating the notification effect to the image control board (image control CPU 421) 420. FIG.

The image control CPU 421 causes the liquid crystal display device 30 to display each image of the notification effect when receiving the effect control command indicating the notification effect. In this embodiment, when the sub-control board (sub-CPU 412) 400 receives a second command specifying a stop operation order advantageous to the player (when the main CPU 301 transmits the second command), the second command Notification of the stop operation mode (stop operation order) corresponding to is always executed by the sub CPU 412 .

It should be noted that, from the first command that indicates that the specific group has won the lottery, the stop operation order (irregular pushing order) that is one-sidedly advantageous in the current game is specified. However, the first command does not specifically specify the stop operation order (correct answer order) that is advantageous to the player. Even if the sub CPU 412 receives the first command during the non-instruction period, the sub CPU 412 does not notify the stopping operation order.

FIG. 17 is a conceptual diagram of the notification effect determination table. When the sub CPU 412 receives any one of the commands “B01” to “B06” as the second command, it determines the notification effect using the notification effect determination table. As described above, the commands "B01" to "B06" are transmitted during the instruction period and are not transmitted during the non-instruction period. That is, the sub CPU 412 determines the notification effect from the notification effect determination table in the game during which the main CPU 301 is instructed.

Specifically, when the second command "B01" is received in the game (winning game of the specific group) in which the first command "A04" is received, the notification effect X1 is determined. In the notification effect X1, the liquid crystal display device 30 or the like notifies the stop operation order of "left center right".

Further, in the game in which the first command "A04" is received, when the second command "B02" is received, the notification effect X2 is determined, and when the second command "B03" is received, the notification effect X3 is generated. When it is determined and the second command "B04" is received, the notification effect X4 is determined, and when the second command "B05" is received, the notification effect X5 is determined and the second command "B06" is received. In this case, the notification effect X6 is determined. In the notification effect X2 described above, the stop order of "right-left middle" is notified, in the notification effect X3, the stop order of "middle left-right" is notified, and in the notification effect X4, the stop order of "middle right-left" is notified, In the notification effect X5, the stop order of "right, left, middle" is notified, and in the notification effect X6, the stop order of "right, middle, left" is notified. In each notification effect X (1 to 6) described above, the correct pressing order of the batting order plum is notified.

FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b) are diagrams for explaining each table used in the special lottery and the normal lottery (see FIG. 13(a) described above). Hereinafter, the special lottery and the normal lottery may be collectively referred to as "BB lottery" for explanation. Details will be described with reference to FIG. 19(a), but the BB lottery is implemented by a determination condition lottery process and a BB determination process. The determination condition lottery process is a process for determining the determination condition Dh. The BB determination process is a process for determining whether or not to shift to the BB state based on the determination condition Dh determined in the determination condition lottery process.

FIG. 18A is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the determination condition determination table. In the determination condition lottery process, the main CPU 301 determines the determination condition Dh by lottery using the determination condition determination table. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the determination condition determination table includes lottery values for each determination condition Dh (0 to 5). Each lottery value described above is provided for each set value. In the determination condition lottery process, the determination condition Dh having a larger lottery value in the determination condition determination table is more likely to be determined. As shown in FIG. 18(a), six types of determination conditions Dh, from determination condition "0" to determination condition "5", are provided. As can be understood from FIG. 18(a), the determination condition lottery process does not depend on the winning area.

FIG. 18(b) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the BB determination table. In the BB determination process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to transition to the BB state by referring to the BB determination table using the predetermined determination condition Dh. Specifically, in the BB determination process, it is determined whether or not to shift to the BB state according to the combination of the winning area determined in the current game and the determination condition Dh determined in advance.

For example, when the determination condition "0" is determined, the transition to the BB state is determined when a ready-to-win combination (1 to 7) is won in a game in which the BB determination process is executed. In addition, when the determination condition "1" is determined, the transition to the BB state is determined when the ready-to-win win or cherry is won in the game in which the BB determination process is executed. When determination condition “2” is determined, transition to the BB state is determined when a ready-to-win win or bell is won in a game in which BB determination processing is executed.

Similarly, when the determination condition "3" is determined, the transition to the BB state is determined when the ready-to-win win, cherry or bell is won in the game in which the BB determination process is executed. Further, when the determination condition "4" is determined, the transition to the BB state is determined when the ready-to-win game, cherry, bell, replay 2 or replay 3 are won in the game in which the BB determination process is executed. When the determination condition "5" is determined, the transition to the BB state is determined regardless of the type of winning area in the game in which the BB determination process is executed (in all winning areas).

Returning to FIG. 18(a). FIG. 18(a) shows a determination condition determination table that is referred to during the low-probability period of the normal state. The determination condition determination table described above is also referred to during the low-probability period of the pullback state. The main CPU 301 uses different determination condition determination tables for the low-probability period and the high-probability period. When the determination condition determination table for the high-probability period is used, the determination condition Dh that is advantageous is more likely to be determined than when the determination condition determination table for the low-probability period is used. With the above configuration, it is easier to determine the transition to the BB state during the high probability period than during the low probability period. Further, in the Heaven Chance state, the Heaven state and the Super Heaven state (special lottery), a determination condition determination table that is more advantageous than the normal state and pullback state (normal lottery) is referred to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, penalty control (main penalty control, sub-penalty control) can be executed when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order. When penalty control (main penalty control) is executed, a penalty occurs that makes it difficult to determine the transition to the BB state in the BB lottery. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIGS. 19(a) and 19(b) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the main penalty control executed by the main CPU 301 among the penalty controls. When the main penalty control is executed, it becomes difficult to determine the transition to the BB state during the non-instruction period. For example, when the main penalty control is executed, it becomes difficult to determine the transition to the BB state in the BB lottery. The above BB lottery (BB determination process, determination condition lottery process) is executed in each game in the non-specified state (normal state, pullback state, heaven chance state, heaven state, super heaven state) during the advantageous section.

FIG. 19A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the BB lottery. In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that the main penalty control is not executed. Each process in FIG. 19A is executed by the main CPU 301 in order from the process shown on the upper side to the process shown on the lower side. It should be noted that FIG. 19(a) shows part of each process in the Nth game and the N+1th game. Also, the determination condition Dh is stored (held) in a specific storage area of the main RAM 303 . FIG. 19A shows determination conditions Dh stored in the main RAM 303 at each time point. The same applies to FIG. 19(b), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), when the game start operation (operation of the start lever 24) is executed, the start process is executed. The start-time processing described above is completed before the first stop operation can be accepted. In addition, the starting process includes a BB determination process (Sa1 in FIG. 19A) and a process for initializing the determination condition Dh (Sa2 in FIG. 19A). As described above, in the BB determination process, it is determined whether or not to transition to the BB state using the determination condition Dh. Specifically, in the BB determination process in the current game, it is determined whether or not to shift to the BB state using the determination condition Dh determined in the previous game. For example, in the BB determination process in the N-th game shown in FIG. 19A, the determination condition Dh determined in the (N-1)-th game is used.

In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that the judgment condition "1" is determined in the N-1th game (Dh=1). In the above case, in the BB determination process in the N-th game, it is determined whether or not to shift to the BB state under the determination condition "1". In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that the transition to the BB state is not determined in the BB determination process in the N-th game. As shown in FIG. 19A, the determination condition Dh is initialized to the determination condition "0" in the starting process after the BB determination process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 19A, when all the stop buttons 25 are operated to stop, the stop processing is executed. The stop processing is completed before betting medals for the next game can be inserted. The stop time process described above includes the determination condition lottery process (Sa3 in the figure). However, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 19(b), when the stop operation is performed in the current game in an irregular pressing order, the judgment condition lottery process in the game is omitted. In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that the stop operation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "forward pressing") is performed at the left first stop in the N-th game. In the above case, the determination condition lottery process is executed in the N-th game.

In the judgment condition lottery process, the judgment condition Dh to be used in the next game is determined by lottery. As described above, the determination condition Dh used in the BB determination process in the current game is initialized (in Sa2 described above) before the determination condition lottery process is executed in the game. Therefore, the determination condition Dh of the main RAM 303 becomes the initial value "0" immediately before the determination condition lottery process is executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that the determination condition "2" is determined in the N-th game. In the above case, in the N-th game, the judgment condition "0" stored in the main RAM 303 is rewritten to the judgment condition "2". As shown in FIG. 19A, the determination condition "2" determined in the N-th game is used in the N+1-th BB determination process. Note that the time at which the processing (Sa2) for initializing the determination condition Dh is executed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the determination condition Dh may be initialized in the stopping process immediately before the determination condition lottery process is executed.

FIG. 19(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the BB lottery. In the specific example of FIG. 19(b), similarly to the specific example of FIG. 19(a), it is assumed that the transition to the BB state is not determined in the BB determination process of the N-th game. However, while FIG. 19(a) described above shows a specific example in which the main penalty control is not executed, the specific example in FIG. 19(b) assumes a case where the main penalty control is executed. In the specific example of FIG. 19(b), it is assumed that the penalty control is executed in the N-th game. When the main penalty control is executed in the N-th game, it becomes difficult to determine the transition to the BB state in the N+1-th game compared to the case where the main penalty control is not executed in the N-th game.

Specifically, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order in the current game, the judgment condition lottery process is omitted in the process at the time of stop in the game. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 19(b), it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order in the N-th game. The main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop operation order in the game is an irregular push order in the stop time processing of each game during the non-instruction period. If the main CPU 301 determines that it is not an irregular pushing order, the main CPU 301 executes determination condition lottery processing in the stop processing. On the other hand, when determining that the pressing order is irregular, the main CPU 301 does not execute determination condition lottery processing in the stop processing.

As described above, since the determination condition Dh is initialized in the start process, the determination condition Dh is the initial value "0" when the stop process is executed. Therefore, if the determination condition lottery process is omitted in the current game stop process, the determination condition "0" is used in the BB determination process (start time process) of the next game. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 19B, since the determination condition lottery process in the Nth game is omitted, the determination condition "0" (initial value) is used in the BB determination process in the N+1th game.

When the determination condition "0" is used, it is more difficult to determine the transition to the BB state in the BB determination process than when the other determination conditions Dh (1 to 5) are used. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the irregular pressing is performed in the current game (when the penalty control is executed), it is difficult to determine the transition to the BB state in the next game compared to the case of the forward pressing in the game. Become.

In the present embodiment, if an irregular push is made in the current game, it becomes difficult to determine the transition to the BB state in the next game. A transition to a state is determined. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the game that becomes disadvantageous due to one main penalty control is limited.

As described above, the high-probability transition lottery is executed in each game in the normal state and the pullback state. The above high-probability transition lottery is included in the stop processing. In this embodiment, if a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order in the current game, the high-probability transition lottery is not executed. Also, as described above, the high-probability falling lottery is executed in the high-probability period. The high-probability drop lottery described above is included in the start-time processing executed at the start of the game, and is executed regardless of the stop operation order of the game.

Each processing (including penalty control) described above with reference to FIG. 19 is executed regardless of the game state (internal medium state, non-internal medium state, bonus operation state). That is, in addition to the internal medium state, the BB lottery (determination condition lottery process, BB determination process) is also executed in the non-internal medium state and bonus operation state. However, for example, in the bonus operation state, the BB lottery may not be executed regardless of the ball output state. Similarly, in the non-internal middle state, the BB lottery may not be executed regardless of the ball-out state.

20(a) and 20(b) are diagrams for explaining the stock lottery process. As described above, in this embodiment, when the transition to the BB state is determined, the stock lottery process is executed. In the stock lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the above-mentioned 1G ream stock and super heaven stock (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "BB stock") are given. Specifically, in the stock lottery process, stock numbers (0 to 9) are determined by lottery using the stock determination table shown in FIG. 20(a). In addition, a BB stock corresponding to the stock number is provided (see FIG. 20(b)).

As shown in FIG. 20(a), the stock determination table includes lottery values for each stock number. A stock number with a larger lottery value has a higher probability of being determined by the stock lottery process. For example, when stock number "0" is determined, as shown in FIG. Also, when the stock number "1" is determined, one super-heaven stock is given, and the 1G ream stock is not given. Similarly, when the stock number "2" is determined, 2 super heaven stocks are given, and when the stock number "3" is determined, 3 super heaven stocks are given, and the stock number "4" is decided When it is done, 4 super heavenly stocks will be given. When the stock number "5" is determined, the super heaven stock is not given, and one 1G ream stock is given. Similarly, when the stock number "6" is determined, the super heaven stock is not given, and two 1G ream stocks are given. When the stock number "7" is determined, one super heaven stock is given, and one 1G ream stock is also given. Similarly, when the stock number "8" is determined, 2 super heaven stocks and 1 1G ream stock are awarded. When the stock number "9" is determined, 3 super heaven stocks and 1 1G ream stock are also given.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), each lottery value for each stock number differs depending on whether the preferential stock flag is ON or OFF. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21(a), but when it is decided to shift to the BB state, in principle, the stock preferential treatment flag is turned from the OFF state to the ON state before the stock lottery process is executed. Be changed. That is, the stock lottery process is normally executed with the stock preferential treatment flag turned on. On the other hand, when the main penalty control is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined (when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order), the stock preferential treatment flag is turned OFF when the stock lottery process is executed. becomes (see FIG. 21(b)).

The stock determination table of the present embodiment is configured such that BB stock is less likely to be granted when the preferential stock flag is OFF than when the preferential stock flag is ON. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20(a), when the preferential stock flag is ON, stock numbers "1" to "9" can be determined. As shown in FIG. 20(b), when stock numbers "1" to "9" are determined, BB stocks (either or both 1G ream stocks and Super Heaven stocks) are given. On the other hand, as understood from FIG. 20(a), when the preferential stock flag is OFF, only the stock number "0" is determined, and the stock numbers "1" to "9" are not determined. As shown in FIG. 20(b), when the stock number "0" is determined, no BB stock is given. Therefore, when the preferential stock flag is OFF, no BB stock is given.

As described above, when the main penalty control is executed in a game in which the transition to the BB state has been determined (stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order), the stock preferential treatment flag is turned OFF and the stock lottery process is executed. The above configuration can also be rephrased as saying that the BB stock is not given when the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined.

Note that the content of the stock lottery process can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is equal to or less than a threshold value (for example, 400 times), the BB stock may be difficult to be awarded. Further, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the threshold value, the BB stock may be easily provided. Further, even when the main penalty control is executed, the BB stock may be provided with a lower probability than when the main penalty control is not executed.

21(a-1), FIG. 21(a-2), FIG. 21(b-1) and FIG. 21(b-2) are for explaining another specific example when the main penalty control is executed. is a diagram. As described above, when the main penalty control is executed, a penalty of not giving the BB stock occurs in the stock lottery process.

FIG. 21(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the stock lottery process is executed. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a-1), it is assumed that the main penalty control is not executed. Each process in FIG. 21(a-1) is executed by the main CPU 301 in order from the process shown at the top to the process shown at the bottom. Part of each process is shown in 17(a-1). Also, the above-mentioned stock preferential treatment flag is stored (held) in a specific storage area of the main RAM 303 . FIG. 21(a-1) shows the state (ON/OFF) of the preferential stock flag (Fg) stored in the main RAM 303 at each point in time. The same applies to FIG. 21(a-2).

As described above, when the game start operation is executed, the start process is executed. The start time processing described above includes the BB determination processing. As described above, in the BB determination process, it is determined whether or not to transition to the BB state. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a-1), it is assumed that the transition to the BB state is determined in the BB determination process. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the preferential stock flag is basically turned off in the ball-out state other than the BB state. As shown in FIG. 21(a-1), when the transition to the BB state is determined (when the start processing is executed), the preferential stock flag is turned OFF.

When the final stop operation is executed in the game, the stop processing is executed as described above. In the stop processing in each game, it is determined whether or not the transition to the BB state has been determined in the BB determination processing (start processing) of the game. When it is determined that the transition to the BB state has been decided, the preferential stock flag is changed from the OFF state to the ON state (Sb1 in FIG. 21(a-1)). However, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 21(a-2), when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, even in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, the step of turning the stock preferential treatment flag to the ON state. (Sb1) is omitted. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a-2), it is assumed that the button is pressed forward in a game in which the transition to the BB state is determined. In the above cases, the preferential stock flag is turned ON in the game.

As shown in FIG. 21(a-1), stock lottery processing (Sb2 in FIG. 21) is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined. As described above, in the stock lottery process, it is determined whether or not to give the BB stock with a probability according to the state of the preferential stock flag. When the preferential stock flag is ON, a lottery is drawn to decide whether or not to give the BB stock at a normal probability (probability of giving the BB stock).

FIG. 21(a-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example when the stock lottery process is executed. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a-2), it is assumed that the transition to the BB state is determined, as in the specific example of FIG. 21(a-1). However, while FIG. 21(a-1) described above shows a specific example in which the main penalty control is not executed, the specific example in FIG. 21(a-2) assumes a case where the main penalty control is executed. When the main penalty control is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, a penalty of not providing the BB stock occurs.

Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the order of stop operations in the game is an irregular pressing order in the process at the time of stopping each game. As described above with reference to FIG. 21(a-1), when it is determined that the pushing order is not irregular, the main CPU 301 sets the preferential stock flag to the ON state in the stop processing (executes step Sb1). On the other hand, when determining that the pressing order is irregular, the main CPU 301 omits step Sb1. In the above case, the preferential stock flag is maintained in the OFF state during the period after the stop processing.

In the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed by the irregular pushing order in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, the stock preferential treatment flag is turned OFF at the time when the stock lottery process is executed. Therefore, the stock lottery process is executed with a low probability (the probability that the BB stock is granted is 0).

In this embodiment, the BB stock may be provided even in each game in the BB state, which will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 21(b-1). However, as will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 21(b-2), when the main penalty control is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state has been determined (the preferential stock flag has not been changed to the ON state case), no BB stock is granted during subsequent BB states.

FIGS. 21(b-1) and 21(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the stock lottery process in the BB state. In the stock lottery process in the BB state, it is determined whether or not to give one 1G consecutive stock with a probability according to the winning area of each game.

Specifically, when Replay 2 or Replay 3 is won in the BB state, 1G ream stock is given with a probability of about 1/128. In the BB state, if reach 6 or reach 7 is won, 1G ream stock is given with a probability of about 1. If Cherry wins in the BB state, 1G ream stock is given with a probability of about 1/64. If Bell wins in the BB state, 1G ream stock is given with a probability of about 1/14. If other winning areas are won in the BB state, 1G ream stock will not be given. However, when the main penalty control is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined (when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order), the 1G ream stock is not awarded in the BB state.

FIG. 21(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the main penalty control is not executed. FIG. 21(b-1) shows the state (ON/OFF) of the preferential stock flag at each point in time, the content of the stock lottery process, and the state of the ball being put out. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the transition to the BB state is decided in the N-th game in the normal state. Specifically, it is assumed that the transition to the BB state is determined at time t1 of the start operation of the game, and the stock lottery process is executed at time t2 of the final stop operation of the game. The same applies to FIG. 21(b-2) described later.

In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the button is pressed forward in the N-th game. In the case above, in the game, the preferential stock flag is changed to the ON state at the time of the third stop, and stock lottery processing is executed with a normal probability. In addition, the ball output state shifts to the BB state from the next game of the N-th game.

In each game in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the preferential stock flag is in the ON state, and if the preferential stock flag is in the ON state, stock lottery processing is executed. As shown in FIG. 21(b-1), when the preferential stock flag is changed to the ON state in a game in which the BB state is won, the preferential stock flag is maintained in the ON state until the BB state ends. Therefore, when the preferential stock flag is changed to the ON state in the game in which the BB state is won, the stock lottery process is executed in each game in the BB state.

FIG. 21(b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the main penalty control is executed. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), it is assumed that in the N-th game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order. In the above case, in the N-th game, the stock preferential treatment flag is not changed to the ON state (the OFF state is maintained) at the time of the third stop, and the stock lottery process is executed with a low probability.

As described above, in each game in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the preferential stock flag is ON, and if the preferential stock flag is ON, the stock lottery process is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 21(b-2), if the preferential stock flag is not changed to the ON state in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, the preferential stock flag remains OFF until the BB state ends. be done. Therefore, if the preferential stock flag is not changed to the ON state in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, the stock lottery process is not executed in each game in the BB state. That is, when the main penalty control is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, the 1G ream stock is not awarded in the subsequent BB state.

In the above-described embodiment, when the main penalty control is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, the 1G ream stock is not awarded in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined and during the BB state. , the 1G ream stock becomes 0 when the BB state ends. In other words, the BB state ends in a single shot. Even if the main penalty control is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state is decided this time, in the subsequent non-instruction period, the forward push is performed in the game in which the transition to the new BB state is decided. In this case, stock lottery processing is normally executed during the game in which the new BB state is won and during the BB state.

Also, even if the main penalty control is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, the transition lottery (see FIG. 13(a)) at the end of the BB state is normally executed. However, if the main penalty control is executed in the game in which the transition to the BB state is determined, compared with the case where the main penalty control is not executed, even if the transition lottery at the end of the BB is disadvantageous. good.

Each processing (including penalty control) described above with reference to FIG. 21 is executed regardless of the game state (internal medium state, non-internal medium state, bonus operation state). That is, the stock lottery process is executed in the non-internal medium state and the bonus operating state in addition to the internal medium state. However, for example, in the bonus operation state, the stock lottery process may not be executed regardless of the ball output state. Similarly, in the non-internal medium state, the stock lottery process may not be executed regardless of the ball-out state.

FIG. 22(a), FIG. 22(b-1) and FIG. 22(b-2) are diagrams for explaining another specific example when the main penalty control is executed. Details will be described below, but when the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for various counters to reach predetermined threshold values is extended.

FIG. 22A is a diagram for explaining various counters provided in the main RAM 303. FIG. As described above, the main RAM 303 is provided with a high security certificate counter, a heaven chance counter, an advantageous section ceiling counter, a BB ceiling counter, a retraction ceiling counter, a heaven ceiling counter, and a super heaven ceiling counter. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, each of the above counters may be collectively referred to as a "specific counter". FIG. 22(a) shows the initial value of the specific counter, the update timing, and the control when the value reaches "0".

FIG. 22(b-1) and FIG. 22(b-2) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of update processing of a specific counter in each game. FIG. 22(b-1) shows a specific example when the main penalty control is not executed. On the other hand, FIG. 22(b-2) shows a specific example when the main penalty control is executed. As described above, the start process is executed in response to the game start operation. As shown in FIGS. 22(b-1) and 22(b-2), the high security certificate counter among the specific counters is decremented in the starting process (Sc1 in the figure).

As shown in FIGS. 22(b-1) and 22(b-2), in the stopping process executed in response to the third stopping operation, specific counters other than the high-probability guaranteed counter are decremented (Sc2). However, in the stop processing of each game, it is determined whether or not the stop operation is performed by the irregular pressing order in the game. If the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the process of subtracting the specific counter is omitted (FIG. 22(b-2)).

According to the above configuration, the high probability guarantee counter is decremented regardless of the presence or absence of main penalty control. Therefore, there is an advantage that the number of games played until the high-probability guarantee counter is decremented to "0" cannot be illegally extended by performing a stop operation in an irregular pressing order. Note that the high-probability drop lottery is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the main penalty control. Therefore, the high-probability period cannot be illegally extended by performing a stop operation in an irregular pressing order.

Further, when the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required until the heaven ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" is extended. In the above configuration, when the main penalty control is executed, the average number of games played until the heaven state shifts to the BB state is extended, which is disadvantageous to the player. Similarly, when the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the Super Heaven Ceiling Counter to reach "0" is extended, which is disadvantageous to the player.

When the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required until the advantageous section ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" is extended. In other words, the average number of games played until transition to the BB state or EDBB state is extended. Further, if the number of games required for the advantageous interval ceiling counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended, the number of games in the EDBB state is reduced as described above. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player. Further, when the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the ceiling counter between BBs to reach the value "0" is extended, which is disadvantageous to the player.

When the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the withdrawal ceiling counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended, which is disadvantageous to the player. As described above, in each game in the pullback state, the pullback ceiling counter is decremented, and the drop lottery is executed. In this embodiment, when the main penalty control is executed in the pullback state (when the stopping operation is performed in the irregular pushing order), the subtraction process of the pullback ceiling counter is omitted, but the fall lottery is executed.

When the main penalty control is executed, the number of games required for the heaven chance counter to reach the numerical value "0" is extended. That is, the heaven chance state is extended. As described above, after the heaven chance state ends, the pullback state is entered. Also, the withdrawal ceiling counter is not decremented in the Heaven Chance state. Therefore, when the heaven chance state is extended, the number of games required until the withdrawal ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" is substantially extended.

In this embodiment, the heaven ceiling counter, the super heaven ceiling counter, the advantageous section ceiling counter, the BB ceiling counter, and the retraction ceiling counter (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "ceiling counter") are decremented to "0" to shift to the BB state. If so, the stock lottery process described above is executed. Also, as described with reference to FIG. 22(b-2), the ceiling counter is not decremented in a game in which a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order (a game in which main penalty control is executed). That is, the main penalty control is not executed in the game in which the ceiling counter is decremented to "0". In the above configuration, when the ceiling counter is decremented to "0" to shift to the BB state, the stock preferential treatment flag is turned ON when the stock lottery process is executed.

22(b-1) and 22(b-2) (including penalty control) are executed regardless of the gaming state (internal medium state, non-internal medium state, bonus activation state). be done. That is, in addition to the internal medium state, the specific counter is also updated in the non-internal medium state and the bonus operating state. However, for example, in the bonus operation state, the specific counter may not be updated regardless of the ball output state. Similarly, in the non-internal middle state, the specific counter may not be updated regardless of the ball-out state. In the above configuration, after the game state in which the specific counter is not updated ends, the update of the specific counter is resumed. Note that the advantageous interval counter and the MY counter are updated in all games in the advantageous interval, regardless of the game state, the ball output state, and the presence or absence of main penalty control.

As can be understood from the above description, the main penalty control of this embodiment is executed only in the game in which the stop operation is performed in the irregular pushing order. Assume a configuration in which the main penalty control is executed in a plurality of games including a game in which a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order. For example, a configuration is assumed in which it is determined that a transition to a low-probability period occurs over a plurality of games when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order. In the above configuration, if the previous player quits the game immediately after performing the stop operation in the irregular pushing order, there is an inconvenience that the next player is also given a penalty. According to this embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed. The above is the description of the main penalty control.

In the above embodiment, the common main penalty control is executed regardless of the game state (internal medium state, non-internal medium state, bonus operating state) during the non-instruction period (except for the non-advantageous section). be. Specifically, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order in the internal middle state of the non-instruction period, the main penalty control is executed. Further, when the stopping operation is performed in an irregular pushing order in the non-internal intermediate state during the non-instruction period, the main penalty control is executed. Similarly, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order in the bonus operating state during the non-instruction period, the main penalty control is executed.

Assume a configuration in which the presence or absence of main penalty control is switched for each game state. In the above configuration, some players may misunderstand the period during which the main penalty control is executed (game state) as the period during which the main penalty control is not executed. According to the present embodiment, the main penalty control is executed regardless of the game state, so the above problems are suppressed. Moreover, according to this embodiment, for example, there is an advantage that the processing executed by the main CPU 301 in each game state can be easily shared compared to a configuration in which the presence or absence of main penalty control is switched according to the game state.

The sub-penalty control will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that when the main penalty control is executed by the main CPU 301, a penalty is applied to the instruction function of the instruction display device 16, such as making it difficult to shift to the BB state. On the other hand, even if the sub-penalty control is executed by the sub-CPU 412, no penalty related to the instruction function of the instruction display device 16 is given (the ball output rate is not affected).

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when sub-penalty control is executed. When the sub-penalty control is executed, the mode of presentation changes compared to when the sub-penalty control is not executed. Also, sub-penalty control is executed in principle when main penalty control is executed. Therefore, by changing the mode of presentation by the sub-penalty control, it is substantially notified that the main penalty control will be executed.

FIG. 23(a) shows the control contents of the main CPU 301, the control contents of the sub CPU 412, the sound (speech, music, sound effects) output from the speaker, and the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 at each time point. . The specific example of FIG. 23A assumes a non-instruction period. During the non-instruction period, penalty control is executed when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order.

The sub CPU 412 executes an effect lottery process in response to a game start operation. In the effect lottery process, the effect to be executed in the current game is determined by lottery. In each game, an effect determined by the effect lottery process is executed. The above-mentioned effects include, for example, an effect of announcing (suggesting) the winning area determined in the current game, and an effect of making the BB state expect to win. In the above effects, a sound effect corresponding to the effect is output from the speaker, and an effect image corresponding to the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 . However, there is a case where none of the effects are determined in the effect lottery process.

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the state of each effect executing means during the period in which the effect determined by the effect lottery process is not executed may be referred to as "default state". For example, in the default state, the liquid crystal display device 30 displays an image of a specific character walking (see FIG. 24(a) described later). On the other hand, during the period during which the effect is executed, the character GC performing an action (singing, etc.) according to the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 (see FIG. 24(b) described later).

In its default state, the speaker outputs no sound. On the other hand, during the period when the effect is executed, the effect sound corresponding to the effect is output from the speaker. However, depending on the ball-out state, a specific BGM may be output from the speaker in the default state. For example, in a game in which execution of an effect has not been determined, each effect executing means is in a default state. Also, during the non-game period, each effect executing means is in a default state.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the N-th game start operation is executed at time ts1. Also, it is assumed that the penalty control is not executed (forward pressed) in the game (N-1th time) before the game in question. In the above case, the sub CPU 412 executes the effect lottery process immediately after time ts1. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that it is determined that the effect will be executed in the N-th game. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 23( a ), along with the game start operation, the effect sound corresponding to the effect is output from the speaker, and the effect image corresponding to the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 .

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the stop operation is performed at the middle first stop (an example of an irregular pressing order) at time tx of the N-th game. In the above case, the sub CPU 412 shifts to the sub-penalty state (executes sub-penalty control) immediately after (substantially simultaneously) the first stop operation. In the sub-penalty state, each effect determined by the effect lottery process is not executed in principle. Temporarily, when the production|presentation is performed when it transfers to a sub-penalty state, the said production|presentation is stopped. However, an effect that is exceptionally executed in the sub-penalty state may be provided. For example, the effect of notifying the transition to the BB state may be configured to be executed even in the sub-penalty state.

Specifically, when the middle first stop or the right first stop is made in the non-instruction period, immediately after that, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period of time (an example of irregular push notification). The notification sound is a sound for notifying the order of stop operations actually performed by the player (see FIG. 23(b)). When the notification sound is output, the effect sound output before the first stop operation is stopped.

Further, when the middle first stop or the right first stop is performed during the non-instruction period, the notification image is displayed for a predetermined period of time immediately after the first stop operation (an example of irregular press notification). The notification image is an image for notifying the order of stop operations actually performed by the player (see FIG. 23(b)). During the instruction period, regardless of whether the stop operation mode is notified or not, the notification image is not displayed and the notification sound is not output even if the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the third stop operation of the N-th game is executed at time te1. As described above, in a game in which stop operations are performed in an irregular pressing order, when the third stop operation is executed, the main CPU 301 executes main penalty control. In the above configuration, the timing (tx) at which the sub-penalty control is executed differs from the timing (te1) at which the main penalty control is executed. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the degree of freedom of the timing of executing the sub-penalty control is improved compared to a configuration in which the sub-penalty control is executed simultaneously with the main penalty control, for example. That is, there is an advantage that the degree of freedom of the output timing of the notification voice and the display timing of the notification image is improved.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), when the sub-penalty state is entered in the current game, the sub-penalty state continues in the next game. Specifically, when the sub-penalty state is entered, the sub-penalty state continues until a stop operation is performed at the first left stop, the vehicle is switched to the BB state, or the power is turned off/on. Also, in the sub-penalty state, the effect lottery process is not executed. In the above configuration, the effect lottery process is not executed in the next game after the game shifted to the sub-penalty state. Therefore, the effect is not executed in the game following the game that has shifted to the sub-penalty state.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 23(a), the sub-penalty state occurs from time tx when the first stop operation is performed in the Nth game to time ty when the first stop operation is performed in the N+1th game. Therefore, the sub-penalty state occurs at the time of the N+1-th game start operation. That is, the sub-penalty state continues at the time when the effect lottery process in the N+1-th game is originally executed. In the above case, the effect lottery process in the N+1-th game is not executed, and the effect is not executed in the game (each effect executing means is in the default state). In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), since the sub-penalty state ends in the N+1th game, the effect lottery process is executed in the N+2th game, and the effect can be executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the internal middle state, the expected acquisition value A differs between when the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st position and when the stop operation is performed in the right 1st position (A3, 4 ≠ A5, 6). However, the sub CPU 412 executes the same effect processing when the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st position and when the stop operation is performed in the right 1st position in the internal middle state. Specifically, when the stop operation is performed in the advantageous pressing order, the sub CPU 412 performs processing for outputting a notification sound, processing for displaying a notification image, and a sub-penalty state regardless of the stop operation order. Execute the processing for starting in common.

The above configuration has the advantage of simplifying the design of the rendering process compared to the configuration in which completely different rendering processes are executed according to the type of advantageous pressing order. Further, as described above, in the non-internal medium state, the acquisition expected value A differs between when the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st position and when the stop operation is performed in the right 1st position. However, the sub CPU 412, in the non-internal middle state, executes the same effect processing in the case of the stop operation in the middle 1st and in the case of the stop operation in the right 1st (similar to the internal middle state). With the above configuration, the effect of simplifying the design of the rendering process is particularly remarkable. In addition, the sub CPU 412 executes the same effect processing when the stop operation is performed on the middle 1st and when the stop operation is performed on the right 1st in the bonus operation state (similar to the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state).

FIG. 23(b) is a diagram for explaining specific examples of the notification image and the notification sound. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in this embodiment, the combination of the notification image and the notification sound differs depending on the stop button 25 (middle, right) operated for the first stop operation.

Specifically, when the stop operation is performed in the middle first stop during the non-instruction period, the notification image GM1 is displayed. The notification image GM1 is an image displaying a message "pressing from inside" (see FIG. 24(c-1) described later). In addition, when the stop operation is performed at the middle first stop during the non-instruction period, a notification voice "pressing from the middle" is output. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed at the right first stop during the non-instruction period, the notification image GM2 is displayed. The notification image GM2 is an image displaying a message "Pressing from the right" (see FIG. 24(c-2) described later). Further, when the stop operation is performed at the right first stop during the non-instruction period, a notification voice saying "Pressing from the right" is output. Even if the left first stop is made during the non-instruction period, the notification image is not displayed and the notification sound is not output.

In this embodiment, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, a common notification image is displayed regardless of the game state (non-internal state, internal state, bonus operation state). Also, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, a common notification sound is output regardless of the game state. For example, when the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st, the notification image GM1 is displayed regardless of the game state, and the notification sound "pressing from the inside" is output. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the state shifts to the sub-penalty state regardless of the game state.

By the way, as described above, when the game is played with the irregular pushing order, the processing related to the indication function of the indication display 16 (judgment condition lottery processing, stock lottery processing, subtraction of the ceiling counter) is performed more than when the game is played with the left first stop. ) becomes disadvantageous (common in each game state). On the other hand, if the game is played with the irregular pushing order, the expected value of winning medals increases compared to the case where the game is played with the left first stop. In other words, the playability changes between the case where the game is played with the left first stop and the case where the game is played with the irregular pressing order. In the present embodiment described above, some players may prefer the playability when the game is played with the left first stop, and others may prefer the gameability when the game is played with the irregular pushing order.

However, in the case of a configuration that warns that the player has played the game with the irregular pushing order, even a player who prefers the game characteristics of playing the game with the irregular pushing order will feel the inconvenience of having to play with the left first stop. obtain. For example, in a contrast where a player is warned "Please press from the left" when a stop operation is performed in an irregular order, some players end the game in an irregular order.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment employs a notification image and a notification sound that make it difficult to determine that the stop operation has been performed in an irregular pressing order. Specifically, the notification image and notification sound of the present embodiment do not instruct left first stop, but merely notify the fact that the stop operation was performed in an irregular pressing order. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-described inconvenience is suppressed compared to the above-described comparison.

FIGS. 24(a), 24(b), 24(c-1) and 24(c-2) are diagrams for explaining images displayed before and after the sub-penalty control is executed. be. Each of the above figures shows a specific example of each image displayed in the normal state or the pullback state. As described above, a common image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 in the normal state and the pulled-back state.

FIG. 24(a) is a specific example of each image displayed in the default state (when the effect is not executed). The liquid crystal display device 30 of the present embodiment displays various images including, for example, the character GC and the number-of-games image GE in the default state. Also, in the default state, the background image GHa is displayed behind each image. The character GC is displayed at the initial position P in FIG. 24(a) immediately after the liquid crystal display device 30 shifts to the default state, and then reciprocates (walks) in the direction of the black arrow shown in FIG. In FIG. 24(a), the character GC displayed at the initial position P is indicated by a dashed line.

The number-of-games image GE is an image for displaying the number of games played since the previous BB state ended. Specifically, the number in the number-of-games image GE is incremented by "1" with each game start operation. However, the number of times played image GE may be added at the time of the third stop. As described above, after 998 games have been played since the previous BB state is completed, the game transitions to the BB state (the ceiling function is activated). The player can grasp the number of games played until the ceiling function is activated from the number-of-games image GE.

FIG. 24(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect image. The specific example of FIG. 24(b) shows a case where a continuous effect is executed among the respective effects. In the continuous effect, various effect images including the singing character GC are displayed. Also, the number-of-games image GE is displayed during the period in which the effect image is displayed. However, the number-of-games image GE may be temporarily hidden during the period in which the effect image is displayed, and may be displayed again when the effect ends and the default state is entered. In each effect, a background image corresponding to the effect is displayed. For example, in the continuous effect of FIG. 24(b), the background image GHb is displayed behind each image.

The continuous effect of this embodiment continues over a maximum of three games. The number of games of continuous performance is determined by lottery, and tends to be longer in the high probability period than in the low probability period. It is also possible to provide an indication period consisting of a plurality of games from the determination of the transition to the BB state to the actual transition, and to execute the continuous performance during the indication period. In the continuous effect described above, it is finally notified that the game will shift to the BB state.

FIGS. 24(c-1) and 24(c-2) are diagrams for explaining each image displayed immediately after the sub-penalty control is executed (immediately after shifting to the sub-penalty state).

FIG. 24(c-1) shows a specific example of each image displayed immediately after the stop operation is performed in the middle first stop (irregular pushing order). When the sub-penalty state is started by performing the stop operation in the middle first stop, the notification image GM1 is displayed near the approximate center of the screen. As shown in FIG. 24(c-1), the notification image GM1 displays the message "pressing from inside".

FIG. 24(c-2) shows a specific example of each image displayed immediately after the stop operation is performed in the right first stop (irregular pressing order). When the stop operation is performed at the right first stop and the sub-penalty state is started, the notification image GM2 is displayed near the approximate center of the screen. As shown in FIG. 24(c-2), the notification image GM2 displays the message "pressing from the right".

As described above, when the sub-penalty control is executed, the liquid crystal display device 30 will be in the default state. Therefore, when sub-penalty control is executed, each image (character GC, number-of-games image GE, background image Ha) shown in FIG. 24(a) is displayed immediately before sub-penalty control is executed. displayed in place of each image. However, as shown in FIGS. 24(c-1) and 24(c-2), the notification image GM(1, 2) is displayed prior to other images (on the front side).

Specifically, when the sub-penalty control is executed during the period during which the effect is executed, the notification image GM corresponding to the type of the stop button 25 subjected to the first stop operation is displayed, and each effect image being displayed is replaced with the notification image GM. , each image displayed in the default state is displayed. For example, in the above continuous effect (see FIG. 24(b)), when the sub-penalty control is executed, the singing character GC and the like are hidden, and each image displayed in the default state is displayed. . In the above case, the character GC starts to be displayed from the initial position P as shown in FIGS. 24(c-1) and 24(c-2). Further, in the above case, the background image GHa in the default state is displayed instead of the background image GHb being continuously rendered.

The above configuration can also be said to stop the effect being executed when the sub-penalty control is executed. Also, it is assumed that it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed over three games. Even in the above case, when the stop operation is performed in the irregular pushing order in the first or second game of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is stopped at that time (the middle first stop or the right first stop). , do not execute the remaining continuous effects.

By the way, if the image is suddenly hidden without fading out, the screen may look unnatural. In view of the above circumstances, when an image that is being displayed is not displayed, the image is usually faded out. In this embodiment, for example, when the effect image is hidden (when the effect ends) regardless of the sub-penalty control, the effect image is faded out.

However, when the effect being executed is stopped by sub-penalty control, the effect image in the effect is intentionally hidden without fading out. According to the above configuration, since the effect image is hidden in an unnatural manner when the sub-penalty control is executed, there is an advantage that the player can easily recognize that the sub-penalty control has been executed.

Before and after the effect image is hidden, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined switching image (eye-catching image) is displayed on the entire screen. When the above configuration is adopted, when the effect is terminated without using the sub-penalty control, the switching image is displayed and then each image in the default state is displayed, and the effect being executed is stopped by the sub-penalty control. In some cases, each image in the default state may be displayed without displaying the switching image.

According to the above configuration, when the sub-penalty control is executed, the switching image that is normally displayed is not displayed at the end of the effect, so that the player can easily recognize that the sub-penalty control has been executed. There is an advantage. However, even if the effect is forcibly stopped by the sub-penalty control, the switching image may be displayed. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the screen from becoming excessively unnatural when the presentation is forcibly stopped.

When the sub-penalty control is executed during the period in which each image in the default state is displayed, the notification image GM corresponding to the type of the stop button 25 that has been operated for the first stop is displayed, and each image displayed in the default state is displayed. continue to be displayed. However, if the sub-penalty control is executed during the period in which each image in the default state is displayed, the display mode of each image is returned to the display mode immediately after the default state is started.

For example, the character GC starts moving from the initial position P in the default state. In the above configuration, when the character GC is positioned other than the initial position P when the sub-penalty control is executed (when the first stop operation of the irregular pushing order is performed), the character GC is returned to the initial position P. . Specifically, when the sub-penalty control is executed, the character GC moves to the initial position P in an instant. With the above configuration, some players feel that the display position of the character GC has changed unnaturally when the sub-penalty control is executed.

According to the above configuration, the player is made to recognize that the sub-penalty control has been executed, compared with the configuration in which the display mode of each image in the default state does not change at all before and after the sub-penalty control is executed. It has the advantage of being easy. In the above configuration, display of the notification image GM may be omitted when the sub-penalty control is executed.

As described above, when the main penalty control is executed (when the key is pressed irregularly), the ceiling counter update process is omitted. Considering the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, when the main penalty control is executed, the numbers in the number-of-games image GE are not updated. In the above configuration, the number-of-games image GE may be temporarily hidden when the main penalty control is executed. Specifically, the number-of-games image GE may be hidden during the period of the sub-penalty state.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the internal medium state, the expected acquisition value A differs depending on whether the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st position or in the right 1st position (A (3, 4) ≠ A ( 5, 6)). However, the sub CPU 412 makes it possible to execute the same effects in the internal middle state when the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st stage and when the stop operation is performed in the right 1st stage. Specifically, when the stop operation is performed in the advantageous pressing order, the sub CPU 412 enables the output of the notification sound and the display of the notification image regardless of the order of the stop operation. The same is true for the non-internal medium state and the bonus active state.

As can be understood from the above description, as an example of the "similar effect" of the present invention, the "effect of notifying the first stopped stop button" is adopted in the present embodiment. That is, the ``effect for notifying that the middle first stop operation has been performed'' and the ``effect for notifying that the right first stop operation has been performed'' are similar in that they are ``effects for notifying the facts as they are''. It can be said that there is. In the present embodiment, the notification voice is different between when the stop operation is performed on the middle 1st position and when the stop operation is performed on the right 1st position, but it may be the same. Similarly, in each of the above cases, the notification image is different, but it may be common. That is, the "similar production" of the present invention is a concept including the "same production".

25(a) and 25(b) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of other images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30. FIG.

As described above, the main RAM 303 is provided with various counters for controlling the ball-out state. For example, the main RAM 303 is provided with an advantageous section counter and an MY counter that are updated in the advantageous section. At the end of the advantageous period, all the counters for controlling the payout state (payment of balls) including the above counters are initialized. In other words, the above configuration cuts off the flow of the game at the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, depending on the player, when the advantageous section ends, there may be a problem that the motivation for playing the game decreases.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the sub-control board 400 (sub-CPU 412, etc.) of the present embodiment is designed to reduce the player's willingness to play during the period after the end of the current advantageous interval and the start of the next advantageous interval. is easily maintained. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed in the BB state. In the BB state, various images are displayed, including an indication image GS, consecutive win number image GX, and number display image GY. The indication image GS is displayed in the notification effect X (1 to 4) described above (see FIG. 17), and notifies the correct pressing order of the batting order plum, for example. In the specific example of FIG. 25(a), it is assumed that the notification effect X6 for notifying the stop operation order of "left in right" among the notification effects X is executed.

The number of consecutive wins image GX displays the number of wins in the BB state (hereinafter referred to as "number of consecutive wins") before 99 games are executed after the end of the BB state, including the first BB state. FIG. 25(a) shows a specific example of a BB state in which the number of consecutive wins is three. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the period from the start of the first BB state to the end of the Heaven Chance state may be referred to as "continuous chance period". Note that if the game transitions to the EDBB state during the continuous-playing period, the continuous-playing period ends when the EDBB state ends. The number display image GY displays the number of medals given during the consecutive winning period (difference between the number of paid out medals and the number of inserted medals, hereinafter referred to as "the number of won medals"). FIG. 25(a) shows a specific example in which the number of obtained coins is 237. In FIG.

The sub-RAM 414 of this embodiment is provided with various counters for controlling effects. For example, the sub-RAM 414 is provided with a number display counter for storing the current value of the number of wins, a consecutive chance number counter for storing the current value of the number of consecutive chances, and an effect control counter. The counter for displaying the number of medals is incremented each time medals are paid out during the continuous winning period. For example, when 9 medals are paid out during the consecutive winning period, the value "9" is added to the counter for displaying the number of medals. Also, in each game during the consecutive chance period, the number of medals used in the game is subtracted from the counter for displaying the number of medals.

The effect control counter is decremented by "1" in each game in a ball-out state (heaven-chance state) other than the BB state during the continuous-chang period. When the above effect control counter is decremented to the numerical value "0", it is determined that the current consecutive chance period has ended. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the above counters in the sub RAM 414 are collectively referred to as "sub counters". In the present embodiment, the sub-counter is configured to be maintained without being initialized when the advantageous section ends.

FIG. 25(b) is a diagram for explaining the numerical value of the sub-counter at each time point. FIG. 25(b) shows the numerical values of the sub-counters (Cs1, Cs2, Cs3) at each time point. 25(b) shows the numerical values of the heaven chance counter (Cm), the MY counter (Cx) and the advantageous section counter (Cy) of the main RAM 303. FIG. In addition, FIG. 25(b) shows the state of the ball output at each time point.

The sub CPU 412 of the present embodiment shifts to an effect state corresponding to the ball-out state (state of the main CPU 301). Each effect execution means (liquid crystal display device 30, etc.) is controlled in a mode corresponding to the effect state. FIG. 25(b) shows the rendering state at each time point. For example, during a period in which the ball-out state is the BB state, the effect state is the during-bonus effect state. In the bonus effect state, for example, each image shown in FIG. 25A is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 . Also, during the period when the ball-out state is the normal state or the pulled-back state, the effect state becomes the normal effect state. In the normal effect state, for example, each image shown in FIG. 24(a) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), during the period when the ball output state is the heaven state, the non-advantageous section after the BB is finished, and the subsequent period of the heaven chance state, the effect state is the consecutive win effect state. In other words, the effect state during a series of wins is a state of effect in a ball-out state in which the degree of expectation for transition to the BB state is high. In the continuous-chang effect state described above, for example, various effects suggesting that the degree of expectation for transition to the BB state is high are executed. For example, the housing lamp 5 is turned off in principle in the normal effect state, but lights up in red in the continuous-challenging effect state.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(b), it is assumed that the heaven state transitions to the BB state at time t1. Also, it is assumed that the number of consecutive wins counter (Cs2) is "Nb-1" (Nb is an integer equal to or greater than 2) immediately before the transition to the BB state. In the above case, at time t1, the number of consecutive wins counter is added to the numerical value "Nb" (the numerical value "1" is added). In addition, in the BB state (in-bonus effect state), a consecutive winning number image GX displaying a number "Nb" is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(b), it is assumed that in the BB state, the number display counter is incremented from the numerical value "Nas" to the numerical value "Nae" (Nas and Nae are positive integers). In the above case, when the BB state ends (time t2), the number display image GY displays the number "Nae". It should be noted that the effect mode (BGM, etc.) in the during-bonus effect state (BB state) may be changed according to the number of consecutive wins. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect mode in the continuous-channing effect state changes according to the number of consecutive-chans. Similarly, the effect mode in the bonus during effect state may be changed according to the acquired number, or the effect mode in the continuous play effect state may be changed according to the acquired number.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(b), it is assumed that the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined in the transition lottery at the end of the BB state. In the above case, each counter (Cm, Cx, Cy) of the main RAM 303 is initialized. On the other hand, the sub-counter is maintained without being initialized even when the transition is made to the non-advantageous section.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 25(b), the number display counter at time t2 when the advantageous interval ends is the number "Nae", and the number of consecutive wins counter is the number "Nb". The numerical values of the above counters are not initialized before and after the end of the advantageous section. Also, the numerical values of the respective counters are not initialized before and after the start of a new advantageous section.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(b), it is assumed that it is decided to shift to a new advantageous section in the first game of the non-advantageous section (time t3). Specifically, it is assumed that the state shifts to the Heaven Chance state at the start of a new advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 25(b), when the advantageous interval starts, the MY counter (Cx) has an initial value of "0" and the advantageous interval counter is set to an initial value of "1500".

In this embodiment, at each time point of the consecutive chance period, the numerical value of the production control counter and the numerical value of the heaven chance counter are in principle the same. Specifically, when the heaven chance state is started, the initial value "98" is set to the heaven chance counter, and the initial value "98" is set to the effect control counter. Also, the heaven chance counter and the production control counter are each subtracted by the numerical value "1" in each game.

As described above, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order in the Heaven Chance state, which is the non-instruction period, the main CPU 111 omits updating the Heaven Chance counter. The sub CPU 412 of this embodiment omits the updating process of the effect control counter in the next game in which the heaven chance counter updating process is omitted. In addition, in the game in which the update process of the heaven chance counter is omitted, the configuration may be such that the update process of the effect control counter is omitted.

In the present embodiment described above, it is possible to match the time when the heaven chance state ends and the time when the continuously playing effect state ends (the time when the consecutive playing period ends). That is, it is possible to synchronize the actual ball-out state and the effect state (mode of the effect executing means). In the present embodiment, the non-advantageous section is changed to the continuous-challenging production state, but during the period after the start of the new advantageous section, or at the same time as the start of the new advantageous section, the transition is made to the continuous-challenging production state. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In addition, during the period of consecutive wins other than the BB state, the number of consecutive wins may be displayed, or the number of wins may be displayed. As shown in FIG. 25(b), when the consecutive chance period ends (when it is determined that the effect control counter has reached the numerical value "0"), the sub-counter is initialized.

FIG. 25(c) is another diagram for explaining the numerical value of each counter at each point in time. FIG. 25(c) shows the value of the MY counter (Cx) and the value of the number display counter (Cs1) in the advantageous section X and the advantageous section Y following the advantageous section X. FIG. In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the advantageous interval X starts at time ta, and then the first BB state starts at time tb. In the above case, the MY counter does not increase or decrease in principle during the non-instruction period from time ta to time tb (approximately becomes "0"). In addition, the consecutive chance period is started at time tb. The number display counter is a numerical value "0" at the start time tb of the continuous playing period.

In the BB state, the MY counter (Cx) and the number display counter (Cs1) are incremented in principle. In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the first BB state in the advantageous section X ends at time tc. In the above case, each counter is incremented in principle from time tb in the BB state to time tc. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the advantageous section X continues at the end time tc of the BB state. In these cases, the MY counter is not initialized. As described above, the number display counter is not initialized regardless of whether the advantageous section continues. In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), since the period from time tc to time td is not an instruction period, the number display counter and the MY counter basically decrease.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the second BB state in the advantageous section X is started at time td, which is the consecutive chance period. It is also assumed that the advantageous section X ends at the end time te of the BB state. In the above cases, the MY counter is initialized. If the value of the MY counter (Cx) and the value of the number display counter (Cs1) are the same at the start of the first BB state in the advantageous interval (when the value is "0"), the advantageous interval ends. Until (until the MY counter is initialized), the numerical values of the respective counters are substantially the same. In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), the numerical values of the respective counters substantially match from time tb to time te.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that a new advantageous section Y starts at time tf. In the above case, the value of the MY counter at time tf is "0". On the other hand, since the number display counter is not initialized regardless of whether or not the advantageous section continues, during the period after time tf (excluding the period after the consecutive game period ends), Numeric value.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the first BB state in the advantageous section Y starts at time tg. Time point tg is the consecutive-chan period. That is, it is assumed that the BB state for the third time in the consecutive chance period starts at time tg. In the above case, during the period from the time tb when the consecutive playing period starts to the time tg and after, the number display counter continues to be updated without being initialized.

In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), since the period from time tf to time tg is not the instruction period, the number display counter is decreased in principle. On the other hand, the MY counter initialized at time tf does not, in principle, increase or decrease during the continuous playing period from time tf to time tg (approximately becomes "0"). In the specific example of FIG. 25(c), it is assumed that the first BB state in the advantageous section Y ends at time th. It is also assumed that the advantageous section Y continues at time th. In the above case, neither the MY counter nor the number display counter are initialized.

As can be understood from the above description, in this embodiment, the number display counter can be added to a larger value than the MY counter (see the period after time tf in FIG. 25(c)). Note that the number display counter of the present embodiment can be added to a value larger than the threshold "2400" with which the MY counter is initialized. However, in the above configuration, there is a problem that the gambling spirit of the player is likely to be excessively stimulated. In consideration of the above circumstances, an upper limit value may be provided for the number display counter. For example, in the present embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the number-of-sheets display counter does not increase beyond "2400".

However, in the above configuration, the number-of-sheets display counter may exceptionally be added to the upper limit value of "2400" or more. For example, it is assumed that 9 medals are paid out in a game with a value of "2399" in the MY counter, and the advantage interval is forced to end. In the above case, a configuration may be adopted in which the number display counter is incremented up to the number "2408" (=2399+9), and the number "2408" is displayed as the final number of acquired coins.

In this embodiment, a configuration is assumed in which the instruction period (for example, EDBB state) can be forcibly terminated along with the end of the advantageous section. In the above configuration, the number of medals until the end of the advantageous section (the number of medals until the MY counter reaches the value "2400") may be displayed immediately before the end of the advantageous section (instruction period). With the above configuration, even if the MY counter and the number display counter do not match, there is an advantage that the number of medals until the MY counter reaches the numerical value "2400" can be grasped.

Further, in the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which a message indicating that the advantageous section is about to end is displayed. As a specific example of the above configuration, in the game after the MY counter has been added to the numerical value "2350" or more, a configuration is conceivable in which a message "advantageous section ends with XX cards remaining" is displayed. Furthermore, in the above specific example, when the MY counter reaches the threshold "2400" and the advantageous section ends, a message to that effect message) can be displayed.

<Each process executed by the main CPU>
The main CPU 301 executes various processes using each data described above. The main CPU 301 executes start-up processing when a reset signal is input from the reset circuit. A reset signal is output when the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board 300 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when the supply of power supply voltage to the main control board 300 is started by turning on the power switch 511SW, the startup process is executed. In the startup process, the main CPU 301 initializes each register of the main control board 300 and the like.

Also, in the activation process, the main CPU 301 executes various processes including a process for changing setting values (a process for transitioning to a playable state). Note that the main CPU 301 may execute a security check process for judging the legitimacy of the control program stored in the main ROM 302 before the boot process. After completing the start-up process, the main CPU 301 shifts to game control process. In this embodiment, when the set value is changed, the game state shifts to the non-internal medium state, and the ball-out state becomes the non-advantageous section. Also, a storage area including a specific counter (see FIG. 22(a)) is initialized.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart of game control processing of the main CPU 301 . The game control process is executed each time the player plays a game. Although the details will be described later, the main CPU 301 executes interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1.49 ms) during the period in which the game control processing is executed. That is, the main CPU 301 alternately executes game control processing and interrupt processing. For example, the command transmitted to the sub-control board 400 is set in the game control process and transmitted to the sub-control board 400 in the interrupt process. The results of various lotteries executed by the main CPU 301 or commands indicating numerical values of various counters provided in the main RAM 303 are sent to the sub-control board 400 as appropriate. Also, each timer (for example, wait timer) set in the game control process is subtracted in the interrupt process.

When starting the game control process, the main CPU 301 executes an initial setting process (S101). The initialization process is executed each time one game is completed. In the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 initializes a storage area of the main RAM 303 that is initialized for each game. For example, the winning area storage area in which the winning area (winning area number) of the previous game is stored is initialized in the initial setting process.

After the initial setting process, the main CPU 301 shifts to the automatic loading process (S102). By the automatic insertion process, when the symbol combination related to replay is completed on the activated line as a result of the previous game, the main CPU 301 sets the same number of bet medals as the previous game as bet medals for the current game.

After the automatic insertion process, the main CPU 301 shifts to the game start pre-process (S103). In the game start pre-processing, the main CPU 301 detects medals from the medal insertion unit 8 and detects operation of the checkout button 23 . When the insertion of medals is detected in the game start pre-processing, the main CPU 301 adds bet medals or credits. Also, in the game start pre-processing, when the operation of the settlement button 23 is detected, the main CPU 301 refunds bet medals or credits. Further, the main CPU 301 detects an operation of the start lever 24 (that is, a game start operation) in the game start preprocessing.

When the main CPU 301 detects a game start operation in the game start pre-processing, the main CPU 301 proceeds to the set value confirmation process (S104). In the set value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 determines whether the set values are appropriate. Specifically, in the setting value confirmation process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the setting value is within the range of the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "6". When determining that the setting value is not within the range of numerical values "1" to "6", the main CPU 301 stores a setting value abnormality command indicating an abnormality of the setting value in the command storage area, and shifts to setting value error processing. .

When the main CPU 301 determines in the setting value confirmation process that the setting values are appropriate, it acquires the random value R1, the random value R2, and the random value R3 (S105). The random number R1 is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 304 and used in the internal lottery process. The random number R2 is a software random number obtained from a register built into the main CPU 301, and is used in the reel effect determination process and the like. The random number value R3 is used in processing related to the pointing function. The main CPU 301 stores the acquired random value R1 in the random value R1 storage area of the main RAM 303 . Similarly, the main CPU 301 stores the obtained random value R2 in the random value R2 storage area of the main RAM 303 and stores the random value R3 in the random value R3 storage area of the main RAM 303 .

After storing the random value R1, the random value R2, and the random value R3 in the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 shifts to start processing (S106). The starting process includes an internal lottery process for determining the winning area with a random number value R1, a BB determination process for determining transition to the BB state, and a reel performance for determining the reel performance with a random number value R2. It consists of each process including the effect determination process. Also, the starting process includes an instruction number determination process for determining an instruction number.

After executing the start time processing, the main CPU 301 executes the reel effect processing (S107). For example, in the reel performance process, various game operations are accepted, and the process of switching the mode of the reels 12 (acceleration, variable display, stop, rest, vibration) is executed. Further, the main CPU 301 sets the above-described delay time by lottery in the reel effect processing. It should be noted that the remaining time of the wait period is also subtracted in the reel effect processing.

After executing the reel effect processing, the main CPU 301 executes wait processing (S108). The wait process is a process for making the time length of each game longer than or equal to a predetermined length. In the wait process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the wait period has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait period has not elapsed, the wait process does not proceed to pre-stop processing described later.

On the other hand, when determining that the wait period has elapsed, the main CPU 301 shifts to pre-stop processing (S109). In the pre-stop processing, various data (priority order, etc., which will be described later) are stored in the main RAM 303 according to the winning area determined by the internal lottery processing. In the stop control process, which will be described later, each reel 12 is stopped according to each data stored in the pre-stop process, so that the symbol combination associated with the winning combination specified in the winning area is stopped and displayed on the active line.

After executing the pre-stop process, the main CPU 301 shifts to the stop control process (S110). By the stop control process, the main CPU 301 stops the reel 12 corresponding to the stop button 25 each time the stop button 25 is operated. Each reel 12 stops at a symbol position corresponding to each data set in the pre-stop processing described above.

After stopping all the reels 12 in the stop control process, the main CPU 301 shifts to the display determination process (S111). In the display determination process, the main CPU 301 determines the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Further, the main CPU 301 sets various data according to the type of combination of symbols displayed on the activated line. For example, when determining that the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the main CPU 301 sets the replaying flag to the ON state. Further, when the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol combination related to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line, it adds the number of medals according to the type of the winning combination to the number of credits.

After executing the display determination process, the main CPU 301 executes a stop process (S112). In the stop processing, the main CPU 301 shifts the ball-out state and the game state. The above stop processing includes the determination condition lottery processing and the stock lottery processing described above. Further, in the stop processing, the main CPU 301 starts or ends the advantageous section according to the transition of the ball-out state. Specifically, an advantageous section control process, which will be described later, is executed. After completing the stop processing, the main CPU 301 returns the processing to step S101.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart of advantageous section control processing. The main CPU 301 executes the advantageous section control process in the stop time process described above. It should be noted that the advantageous section control process is executed in all games regardless of the game state. When the advantageous interval control process is started, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the current game is in the advantageous interval (Sx0). If it is determined that it is not in an advantageous section (Sx0:No), that is, if it is in a non-advantageous section, the main CPU 301 terminates the advantageous section control process. On the other hand, when determining that the current game is in the advantageous section (Sx0: Yes), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a replay is stopped and displayed on the active line in the current game (Sx1).

When determining that the replay is not stopped and displayed (Sx1: No), the main CPU 301 executes MY counter update processing (Sx2). In the MY counter update process, the MY counter is updated. Specifically, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bet medals (three) from the number of payouts for the current game is added to the MY counter. For example, when the number of coins to be paid out is 9, the value "6" is added to the MY counter. Also, when the number of payouts is 0, the value "3" is subtracted from the MY counter. In the replay (the game following the game in which the replay was stopped and displayed), step Sx2 is executed with the number of automatically inserted medals as the number of bet medals in the game. After executing the MY counter update process, the main CPU 301 advances the process to step Sx3. When determining that the replay has been stopped and displayed in the current game (Sx1: Yes), the main CPU 301 omits the MY counter update process and advances the process to step Sx3.

At step Sx3, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the MY counter is greater than the numerical value "2400". When determining that the MY counter is greater than the numerical value "2400" (Sx3: Yes), the main CPU 301 initializes all parameters related to the indication function stored in the main RAM 303 (Sx5), and terminates the advantageous section control process. . At step Sx5, for example, the above-mentioned specific counter is initialized, and the ball output state shifts to the non-advantageous section. It should be noted that the game state does not change even when the ball output state shifts to the non-advantageous section.

When determining that the MY counter is not greater than the numerical value "2400" (Sx3: No), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the advantageous section counter has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (Sx4). The advantageous interval counter is decremented by "1" at the start time processing described above. When determining that the advantageous interval counter is "0" (Sx4: Yes), the main CPU 301 executes the above-described step Sx5 and terminates the advantageous interval control process. It should be noted that when the determination in step Sx5 is "Yes" (when the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated), it is assumed that the advantageous interval counter is decremented to "0" in the EDBB state. In this embodiment, except for the above cases, the advantageous interval ends before the advantageous interval counter is decremented to "0".

When determining that the advantageous interval counter is not the numerical value "0" (Sx4: No), the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the MY counter is smaller than the numerical value "0" (whether it is a negative number) (Sx6). . If the MY counter is a negative number (Sx6: Yes), the main CPU 301 sets the MY counter to "0" (Sx7), and terminates the advantageous section control process. On the other hand, if the value of the MY counter is greater than or equal to "0" (Sx6: No), step Sx7 is omitted and the advantageous section control process ends.

<Each process executed by the sub CPU>
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the sub-activation process of the sub-CPU 412. As shown in FIG. The sub CPU 412 executes sub activation processing when a reset signal is input from the reset circuit. The reset circuit outputs a reset signal when the power supply voltage supplied to the sub-control board 400 exceeds a predetermined threshold. For example, when the supply of power supply voltage to the sub-control board 400 is started, the sub-startup process is executed.

After starting the sub-startup process, the sub-CPU 412 executes initialization process at startup (S301). In the startup initialization process, the sub CPU 412 initializes various registers of the sub control board 400, for example.

In the startup initialization process, the sub CPU 412 determines whether the backup of the sub RAM 414 is abnormal. If there is a backup abnormality, the sub CPU 412 initializes the backup data. In addition, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the data stored in various ROMs including the CGROM 424 are appropriate in the startup initialization process. For example, data stored at a specific address in each ROM is read, and it is determined whether or not the data is correct. When an abnormality is found in various ROMs, the sub CPU 412 shifts to predetermined error processing.

The sub CPU 412 activates the lamp control task (S302), activates the sound control task (S303), activates the image control board communication task (S304), activates the main control board communication task (S305), and effects The button input task is activated (S306).

The sub CPU 412 controls various lamps including the housing lamp 5 and the performance lamp 28 by the lamp control task. Also, the sub CPU 412 controls the speakers (31, 32) by the sound control task. Further, the sub CPU 412 transmits commands to the image control board 420 by the image control board communication task, receives commands from the main control board 300 in the main control board communication task, The operation of the designation button 27 is accepted.

A timer interrupt signal is input to the sub CPU 412 at predetermined time intervals. When the sub CPU 412 receives the timer interrupt signal, it executes one of the tasks. That is, each peripheral device including various lamps and speakers (31, 32) is controlled in a time division manner.

By the way, the total number of medals obtained in a predetermined number of games is required to be within a predetermined range regardless of which set value is set. Specifically, the total number of medals obtained in 400 games is required to be more than one third of the total number of inserted medals and less than 2.2 times. In addition, the total number of medals obtained in 1600 games must be more than two-fifths of the total number of inserted medals and less than 1.5 times. Also, the total number of medals obtained in 6000 games must be more than half the total number of inserted medals and less than 1.26 times. Furthermore, the total number of medals obtained in 17,500 games must exceed three-fifths of the total number of inserted medals and be less than 1.15 times.

Whether or not the above criteria (hereinafter referred to as "ball output criteria") are met is usually confirmed by a test. If the number of medals tends to decrease excessively in a predetermined number of games, there is a high possibility that the ball output standard will not be met in the test. In addition, if an excessively large number of medals are likely to be obtained in a predetermined number of games, there is a high possibility that the ball output criteria will not be met in the test. In other words, the higher the gambling nature of the gaming machine, the higher the possibility that it will be judged that the ball output standard is not satisfied in the test.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment employs a configuration in which gambling is significantly lower at specific set values than at other set values. Specifically, when the set value "1" is set among the set values, the possibility of meeting the ball output criteria in the test is significantly higher than when other set values are set. adopted. For example, in this embodiment, many medals can be acquired by shifting to the instruction period (BB state). When the set value is set to "1", the probability of shifting to the instruction period (first hit probability) is relatively high, but the instruction period is likely to end in a short period of time (hard to play consecutive games). According to the above configuration, when the set value "1" is set, the probability that the ball output standard is met in the test increases.

However, when the set value "1" is set, the gambling nature is remarkably reduced, and many players feel that the game lacks interest. Therefore, in a configuration in which it is not possible to determine whether or not the set value "1" is set before playing a game, some players may avoid playing games on the gaming machine 1. FIG. In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment adopts a configuration in which it is possible to ascertain whether or not the set value "1" is set before playing the game. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 29(a) is a flowchart of power-on processing by the sub CPU 412. FIG. The sub CPU 412 executes power-on processing immediately after the power is turned on. Also, the power-on process described above is normally completed before the main CPU 301 becomes capable of executing the game control process. That is, the sub CPU 412 completes the power-on processing before the game becomes possible.

When the power-on process is started, the sub CPU 412 checks the setting values set on the main CPU 301 side. Specifically, main CPU 301 transmits a command indicating a set value to sub CPU 412 immediately after power is turned on. The sub CPU 412 confirms the setting value indicated by the command in step Sy1. After that, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the set value confirmed in step Sy1 is "1" (Sy2).

When determining that the set value is not "1" (Sy2: No), the sub CPU 412 determines the normal control mode (Sy3), and terminates the power-on process. On the other hand, when determining that the set value is "1" (Sy2: Yes), the sub CPU 412 determines the special control mode (Sy4), and terminates the power-on process. Details will be described below, but the aspect of the effect execution means (stop button 25, speaker, liquid crystal display device 30) differs between when the normal control mode is determined and when the special control mode is determined. .

FIG.29(b) is a figure for demonstrating the aspect of the production|presentation execution means in each control mode. As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the normal control mode, the stop button 25 emits red light while the operation of the stop button 25 is disabled (for example, while the corresponding reel is stopped). On the other hand, in the special control mode, the stop button 25 emits green light while the operation of the stop button 25 is disabled.

With the above configuration, the player can identify whether or not the setting value "1" has been set before playing by checking the color of the stop button 25 . However, as shown in FIG. 29B, the color of the stop button 25 during the period in which the stop operation is possible is blue in common in each control mode. Let us assume a configuration in which the color of the stop button 25 during the period in which the stop operation is possible is different for each control mode. In the above configuration, it may be difficult for some players to intuitively determine whether or not the stop operation is effective. According to this embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can adjust the master sound volume by operating the direction specifying button 27 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(b), when the control mode is the normal control mode, the player can adjust the master sound volume. On the other hand, in the special control mode, the master volume cannot be changed. According to the above configuration, the player can specify that the setting value "1" is set when the master volume cannot be changed. However, in any control mode, an error sound for announcing an error is output at the maximum volume.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can change the presentation mode (enjoy mode, normal mode, simple mode) by operating the direction specifying button 27 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(b), when the control mode is the normal control mode, the player can change the effect mode. On the other hand, in the special control mode, the effect mode cannot be changed. According to the above configuration, when the effect mode cannot be changed, the player can specify that the set value "1" is set.

In this embodiment, immediately after the sub CPU 412 recovers from the power-off state, the power-on process is executed and the stop button 25 is displayed in green. According to the above configuration, for example, when the stop button 25 is displayed in green, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 who has turned on the power can immediately grasp that the setting value "1" is set. It has the advantage of being able to

The image of the liquid crystal display device 30 in the non-game period may be different between the normal control mode and the special control mode. With the above configuration, as in the present embodiment, whether or not the set value "1" is set can be specified before playing the game. However, the lamp (including the lamp of the stop button) generally takes a shorter time from power-on to restoration than the liquid crystal display device 30 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to specify that the set value "1" is set after the power is turned on, compared to a configuration in which only the image of the liquid crystal display device 30 changes in each control mode, for example. There is an advantage that the time to is shortened.

30(a) to (c) are flowcharts of effect control processing by the sub CPU 412. FIG. The effect control process is a process for controlling effects in the effect executing means (such as the liquid crystal display device 30). As shown in FIGS. 30(a) to (c), the effect control processing includes sub start processing, sub first stop processing, and sub stop processing. 30(a) to (c) show an excerpt from the production control process.

FIG. 30(a) is a flowchart of the sub-starting process. When a game start operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits a command to that effect to the sub CPU 412 (sub control board 400). When the sub CPU 412 receives the command from the main CPU 301, the sub CPU 412 executes sub start processing. As shown in FIG. 30(a), when the sub start time processing is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the sub penalty state is in effect (Sy11). For example, if the stop operation was performed in an irregular pressing order in the previous game during the non-instruction period, the sub-penalty state occurs at the time of execution of the sub-starting process in the current game.

When it is determined that the sub-penalty state is not established (Sy11: No), the sub CPU 412 determines various effects by lottery for effects (Sy12), and ends the sub start time processing. When the effect is determined in step Sy12, the effect is started to be executed by each effect executing means. On the other hand, when determining that the sub-penalty state is in effect (Sy11: Yes), the sub-CPU 412 omits the effect lottery and ends the sub-starting process. According to the above configuration, a new effect is not determined in step Sy12 in the game started during the sub-penalty state.

FIG. 30(b) is a flowchart of the sub-first stop process. When the first stop operation is performed, the main CPU 301 transmits to the sub CPU 412 a command indicating the stop button 25 (left, center, right) for which the first stop operation has been performed. When the sub CPU 412 receives the command from the main CPU 301 during the non-instruction period, the sub first stop process is executed. As shown in FIG. 30(b), when the sub first stop process is started, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the left first stop operation has been performed (Sy21). When determining that the left first stop operation has been performed (Sy21: Yes), the sub CPU 412 ends the sub first stop process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop operation has been performed other than the left first stop (middle first stop, right first stop) (Sy21: No), the sub CPU 412 forcibly terminates the effect currently being executed (Sy22). . For example, the effect started in the last sub start time process is forcibly terminated in the sub first stop process when the middle first stop operation or the right first stop operation is performed thereafter.

In addition, when the stop operation is performed other than the left first stop, instead of the configuration in which all the effects are forcibly ended uniformly, a configuration may be adopted in which some of the effects are continuously executed. For example, when the stop operation is performed other than the left first stop, the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the effect currently being executed is the specific effect. If it is determined to be the specific effect, the specific effect is continuously executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the specific effect, the effect being executed is forcibly terminated. Incidentally, as the above-mentioned specific effect, it is assumed that there is a high degree of expectation (including the case where it is confirmed) that the BB state has been won. Further, as the specific effect, an effect for notifying the transition of the game state (for example, an effect when the BB state starts) is assumed. It is preferable that the specific effect described above is started in the game even if the game scheduled to be started is in the sub-penalty state.

As shown in FIG. 30(b), when the sub CPU 412 determines that a stop operation other than the left first stop has been performed, the sub CPU 412 shifts to the sub penalty state (Sy23). Further, when the sub CPU 412 determines that the stop operation is performed other than the left first stop, the sub CPU 412 executes the notification content determination process (Sy24). In the notification content determination process, the notification image (GM1 in FIG. 24(c-1), GM2 in FIG. 24(c-2)) and notification voice (voice "pressing from inside", voice "pressing from right") ) is determined. Specifically, when the middle first stop operation is performed in the current game, the notification image GM1 and the notification sound "pressing from inside" are determined. Also, when the right first stop operation is performed in the current game, the notification image GM2 and the notification sound "pressing from the right" are determined. Once the notification image is determined, the notification image is immediately displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 . Further, when the notification sound is determined, the notification sound is immediately output from the speakers.

Steps Sy22 to Sy24 described above are executed regardless of whether the first middle stop operation or the first right stop operation is performed in the current game. As can be understood from the above description, the expected acquisition value A differs between when the middle first stop operation is performed and when the right first stop operation is performed. executed. In this embodiment, step Sy22 to step Sy24 are illustrated as "similar effect processing" of the present invention, but other effect processing may be employed. For example, as the "similar effect process", the effect process omitting step Sy22 and/or step Sy23 from step Sy22 to step Sy24 may be adopted.

FIG. 30(c) is a flowchart of the sub-stop process. When the last stop button 25 is operated, the main CPU 301 transmits a command to that effect to the sub CPU 412 . When the sub CPU 412 receives the command from the main CPU 301, the sub CPU 412 executes sub stop processing. As shown in FIG. 30(c), when the sub-stop process is started, the sub-CPU 412 determines whether or not the first left stop operation has been performed in the current game (Sy31). When determining that the left first stop operation has been performed (Sy31: Yes), the sub CPU 412 determines whether or not the sub penalty state is in effect (S32).

When determining that the sub-penalty state is not in effect (Sy32: No), the sub-CPU 412 ends the sub-stop process. On the other hand, when determining that the sub-penalty state is in effect (Sy32: Yes), the sub-CPU 412 cancels the penalty state (Sy33) and ends the sub-stop processing. According to the above configuration, the sub-penalty state is released at the end of the game in which the left first stop operation is performed. If it is determined in step Sy31 described above that the first left stop operation has not been performed (Sy31: No), the sub CPU 412 omits step Sy33 and terminates the sub stop processing. According to the above configuration, when the game is not played on the left 1st, the sub-penalty state is continued in subsequent games.

<Modification>
Each of the above forms may be variously modified. Specific modification modes are exemplified below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the following examples can be combined as appropriate.

(1) In each of the above-described forms, the acquisition expected value A is made different between the stop operation orders of the unfavorable pressing orders (left-center-right, left-right-center). However, the acquisition expected value A may be common among the stop operation orders of the disadvantageous push order. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the acquisition expected value A is common among the stop operation orders of the disadvantageous pushing order, and the acquisition expected value A is different between the stop operation orders of the advantageous pushing order. Further, in each of the above-described forms, the acquisition expected value A is made different for each stop operation order of the advantageous pushing order (middle 1st, right 1st). However, the acquisition expected value A may be common among the stop operation orders of the advantageous push order. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the acquisition expected value A is common among the stop operation orders of the advantageous pushing order, and the acquisition expected value A is different among the stop operation orders of the disadvantageous pushing order.

In each of the above-described forms, the expected acquisition value A is shared between the "middle left and right" and the "middle right and left" of the middle 1st, but they may be different. Further, although the acquisition expected value A is shared between "right-left middle" and "right-center left" in the right 1st, it may be different. Specifically, among the stop operation orders of the irregular pushing order, the obtained expected value A may be different in all of the stop operation orders. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the acquired expected value A is different for only one stop operation order among the stop operation orders of the irregular pushing order.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration for generating the difference value (X, Y) can be changed as appropriate. FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b) are diagrams for explaining a modification having a configuration for generating a difference value (X, Y).

As shown in FIG. 31( a ), there are five effective lines in this modification: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward right line, and a downward right line. Further, as shown in FIG. 31(b), each reel is provided with 20 pieces, symbol position "7" on the left reel 12L, symbol position "7" on the middle reel 12C, and symbol position "7" on the right reel 12R. 7” (one watermelon pattern is arranged on each reel). Furthermore, in this modified example, a watermelon role (the symbol combination is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon") is provided as a winning role. In addition, the watermelon role is elected alone.

In this modification, in the first left stop of the game in which the watermelon combination is won, "pull-in control for stopping the watermelon pattern on the upper or lower stage of the left reel 12L" is executed, and in the middle first stop, "the upper or lower stage of the middle reel 12C" is executed. Draw-in control for drawing the watermelon pattern to the lower stage" is executed. In the above modified example, when the first left stop is made in a game in which the watermelon role is won, the symbol position "12" five frames before the watermelon symbol is positioned on the middle line (unit area UL2) (the watermelon symbol is on the upper row). 7 frames until the symbol position "6" one frame behind the watermelon symbol is located on the middle line (unit area UL2) becomes the retraction range of the watermelon symbol. Therefore, when the stop operation position is random, the watermelon symbol on the left reel 12L is stopped and displayed on the upper line or the lower line with a probability of 7/20.

It is assumed that a watermelon pattern is stopped and displayed on the lower line at the left first stop. In the above case, in the middle second stop, after the symbol position "11" four frames before the watermelon symbol is positioned on the middle line (after the watermelon symbol can be pulled into the middle row), the position one frame behind the watermelon symbol The 6 frames until the symbol position "6" is positioned on the middle line are the drawing range of the watermelon symbol. Therefore, when the stop operation position is random, the watermelon symbol on the middle reel 12C is stop-displayed on the middle line or the bottom line with a probability of 6/20. That is, the pattern combination of the watermelon role is tenpai with a probability of 6/20. Similarly, when the watermelon symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper line at the first stop on the left, the symbol combination of the watermelon combination is ten with a probability of 6/20.

It is assumed that the watermelon symbols tend to appear on the lower line at the left first stop and the middle second stop. In the above case, at the right 3rd stop, after the symbol position "10" three frames before the watermelon symbol is positioned on the middle line (after the watermelon symbol can be pulled into the lower row), one frame behind the watermelon symbol Five frames until the symbol position "6" is positioned on the middle line are the drawing range of the watermelon symbol. Therefore, when the stop operation position is random, the watermelon symbol on the right reel 12R is stopped and displayed on the lower line with a probability of 5/20. That is, when the watermelon pattern is tense on the lower line and the stop operation position is random, the watermelon role is won with a probability of 5/20. In addition, the probability of winning the watermelon combination at the third stop when the stop operation is performed in the "left center right" is common regardless of the line in which the watermelon pattern is tense.

In the above modified example, when the stop operation is performed in the game in which the watermelon role is won, the attraction probability of the watermelon role is 210/8000 (=(7/20)×(6/20)×(5/ 20)). On the other hand, although a detailed explanation is omitted, if the stop operation is performed with the “center left and right” in the game in which the role of watermelon is won, the attraction probability of the role of watermelon is 175/8000 (=(7/20)×(5/20)× (5/20)). As understood from the above description, the watermelon combination is a winning combination that produces a difference value (X, Y). That is, in the modification, the difference value is greater than the numerical value "0".

(3) In each form, either one or both of the difference value XJ and the difference value XH may adopt a configuration in which the numerical value is "0". That is, in the present invention, the configuration that "the difference in the expected acquisition value is less than a predetermined value" includes a configuration in which the difference in the expected acquisition value A (difference value X) is a numerical value "0". .

(4) In each form, the performance related to the instruction function of the instruction display 16 may be configured to change according to the game state. For example, in the bonus operating state of the above-described first embodiment, the BB lottery is not won unless the judgment condition Dh "5" is selected (see FIG. 18(b)), and the instruction function is selected from the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. performance decreased. On the other hand, the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state share the performance related to the instruction function (except for the processing at the transition to the advantageous section). Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the performance related to the pointing function changes between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. For example, in the non-internal medium state, the performance related to the instruction function may be lower than in the internal medium state (for example, it may be difficult to win the BB lottery). Further, in the internal medium state, the performance related to the pointing function may be lowered compared to the non-internal medium state. A configuration may be adopted in which the performance related to the indicating function decreases in the order of the internal medium state, the non-internal medium state, and the bonus operating state.

However, in the configuration in which the performance related to the instruction function changes according to the game state, the player may easily stop playing the game when the game state shifts to the game state in which the performance related to the instruction function is lowered. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to employ a configuration in which the performance of the instruction function changes according to the game state, so that the current game state is difficult to grasp.

For example, in the first embodiment, it is possible to display a notification image, reproduce a notification sound, and shift to a sub-penalty state in both the bonus operation state and other game states in which the performance related to the instruction function is relatively low. made it According to the above configuration, for example, in the bonus operation state, the notification image is not displayed, the notification sound is not reproduced, and the transition to the sub-penalty state is not performed. There is an advantage that it becomes difficult to grasp the current game state from the mode. Further, in addition to the above configuration, the effects that can be executed in each game state may be shared, or the mode of each effect executing means in the default state may be shared.

(5) In each form, the types of game states are not limited to the above examples. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of RBB wins are provided, and the game state changes according to the type of RBB win carried over. For example, two types of RBB hands, RBB hand 1 and RBB hand 2, are provided, and when RBB hand 1 is carried over, the state shifts to internal middle state 1, and when RBB hand 2 is carried over, the state shifts to internal middle state 2. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Further, it may be configured such that the performance related to the pointing function changes between the internal middle state 1 and the internal middle state 2. FIG. For example, the BB lottery and/or the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section may be more advantageous in the internal middle state 2 than in the internal middle state 1 .

In the above modifications, a configuration (for example, the first embodiment) is assumed in which the game progresses in the internal medium state in principle. In the above configuration, the degree of advantage thereafter changes depending on which of the internal intermediate states (1, 2) the machine shifts to in the non-internal intermediate state immediately after the set value is changed. Specifically, once the internal medium state is entered, the advantageous section is started, the transition is made to the non-advantageous section, and the internal medium state is maintained over the period after the advantageous section is started again. Therefore, according to the modification, if the transition to the internal medium state 2, which is relatively advantageous, compared to the case of transition to the internal medium state 1, which is more disadvantageous than the internal medium state 2, a plurality of subsequent advantageous sections The player has an advantage over the (non-advantageous section).

According to the modified example described above, the advantageous state may be maintained over a plurality of advantageous intervals (non-advantageous intervals), so there is an advantage that the game can be easily continued even if the advantageous interval ends. In addition, in the above modified example, a configuration capable of executing an effect of suggesting (announcing) the type of the internal middle state may be adopted. According to the above configuration, the advantage that the game can be easily continued even if the advantageous section ends is particularly remarkable.

However, it is assumed that the symbol stop control differs according to the type of the internal intermediate state (including the game in which the RBB combination is won). In the above configuration, there is a possibility that the type of the internal middle state can be grasped from the stop control. Therefore, there may arise an inconvenience that the fact that the player has shifted to the internal middle state, which is relatively disadvantageous, is immediately grasped and the game is stopped. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the stop control is common regardless of the type of internal intermediate state (including games in which the RBB combination is won). In addition, it is preferable that the type of the winning area and the winning probability of the winning area are substantially the same regardless of the type of the internal middle state. Similarly, it is preferable that the ball-out state to which the ball can be shifted is common regardless of the type of the internal middle state. However, it may be configured such that the winning probability of the replay slightly changes in each internal middle state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the advantageous section is not started when the replay is won.

As a specific example of the above modified example, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of types of RTs with different winning probabilities for replay. In the above configuration, once the state has shifted to the internal medium state, RT is not changed unless the state shifts to the bonus operating state. For example, assume a configuration in which the non-internal medium state and the internal medium state 1 are RT0, and the internal medium state 2 is shifted to RT1. With the above configuration, a BB lottery that is advantageous from RT0 to RT1 is executed. It should be noted that the BB lottery that is more advantageous in RT2 than in RT1 may be performed.

(6) In each form, the expected acquisition value A is unilaterally advantageous in a game state in which no stop operation order is provided (a game state in which the mutual difference between the expected acquisition values A is less than a predetermined value Nx. The bonus operation state is exemplified as "flat game state"). However, the gaming state in which the expected acquisition value A is flat is not limited to the above example. For example, in the internal medium state, a stop operation order in which the expected value A is unilaterally advantageous may be provided, while in the non-internal medium state, the expected value A may be flat.

Specifically, as described above, the batting order plums are the batting order plums (plums CL (1 to 4), etc. in which the correct plums can win both in the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Hereinafter collectively referred to as "invariant plums") (Fig. 10(a)) and the batting order plums (plums CL (5, 6), etc., hereinafter collectively referred to as "variable plums") in which a single hand wins instead of the correct plums in the non-internal middle state (Fig. 10(a) reference). When the winning probability of the plums in the batting order is common, the acquisition expected value A in the non-internal medium state can be adjusted by changing the winning ratio of the constant plums and the variable plums.

For example, when the ratio of variable plums is increased (when the ratio of invariant plums is decreased), the acquired expected value A in the non-internal medium state decreases. In the above configuration, it is sufficient to set the winning ratios of the constant plums and the variable plums so that the acquisition expected value A in the non-internal intermediate state is flat. In the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed in the advantageous pushing order in the internal medium state, the penalty control may be executed in the non-internal medium state, or the penalty control may not be executed.

In addition, in the internal intermediate state, a unilaterally advantageous stopping operation order is provided, and in the non-internal intermediate state, the acquisition expected value A is flat. A common configuration may be used for the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. For example, as in the first embodiment, in the internal medium state, the expected acquisition value A1 (left center right) is "1.5683961", the expected acquisition value A2 (left center) is approximately "1.5684143", and the expected acquisition value Assume a configuration in which A3 and expected acquisition value A4 (middle 1st) are approximately "2.7669029" and expected acquisition value A5 and expected acquisition value A6 (right 1st) are approximately "2.7681847". In the above configuration, in the non-internal middle state, the expected acquisition value A1 (left center right) is about "1.5683961", the expected acquisition value A2 (left center right) is about "1.5684143", and the expected acquisition value A3 and the expected acquisition value A4 (middle 1st) is approximately "1.5684153", and the expected acquisition value A5 and expected acquisition value A6 (right 1st) are approximately "1.5696971".

In the above modified example, while the irregular pushing order is one-sidedly advantageous in the internal medium state, the acquisition expected value A becomes flat in the non-internal medium state. Further, in the modification, the magnitude relationship of each acquisition expected value A is "A1<A2<A3=A4<A5=A6" in common between the internal intermediate state and the non-internal intermediate state. Further, the difference value XJ is approximately "0.0000182" and the difference value XH is approximately "0.0012818" in both the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Assume a configuration in which the magnitude relationship of each expected acquisition value A changes (the advantage is reversed) between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. In the above configuration, there may be a problem that a stop operation order with a relatively low advantage of the expected value A to be obtained is likely to be misidentified as a stop operation order with a high advantage. The modified example described above has the advantage that the above disadvantages are suppressed.

(7) In each form, the content of penalty control can be changed as appropriate. For example, assume a configuration in which the result of the BB lottery is suggested by a pseudo-game. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the pseudo game is not executed when the penalty control is executed.

(8) In each form, the stop operation order in which penalty control is executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the first embodiment, penalty control was executed in all advantageous pushing orders. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the penalty control is executed for some of the advantageous pushing orders and the penalty control is not executed for the other advantageous pushing orders.

(9) In each form, some of the batting order plums (CL (5, 6), CR (5, 6), RL (1 , 2), RC(1, 2), and RC3) are different in stop control, but the above configuration can be changed as appropriate. For example, the stop control for all of the batting order plums whose correct pushing order is an irregular pushing order may be different between the internal middle state and the non-internal middle state. Specifically, in the non-internal middle state, even if any of the batting order plums whose correct pushing order is an irregular pushing order is won, the correct plum does not win regardless of the stop operation order, and the winning combination is one. (In the left 1st, there is a 25% chance of winning a 1-card role, and in the irregular pushing order, a 100% chance of winning a 1-card role) (see FIG. 10(a)).

However, when adopting a configuration in which only one hand can win even if any of the batting order plums whose correct pushing order is irregular pushing order is won, the acquisition expected value A in the middle 1st in the non-internal middle state (3, 4) is about "1.1189537", and the acquisition expected value A (5, 6) on the right 1st is about "1.1202354". That is, in the modification, in the non-internal intermediate state, the expected acquisition value A for the left 1st (see FIG. 12(b)) is greater than the expected acquisition value A for the irregular pushing order.

Specifically, in the above modified example, in the non-internal medium state, the acquisition expected value A for the left 1st is greater than the acquisition expected value A for the irregular pushing order by a specific value Ny (0.1) or more. In the above configuration, it can be said that the advantageous pushing order (one-sidedly advantageous pushing order) changes (reverses) between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Therefore, some players may easily misunderstand the advantageous pressing order. As described above, according to the first embodiment, in some of the plums whose correct stroke order is an irregular stroke order, the correct plum can win even in the non-internal medium state. and (see FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b)). Therefore, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

It should be noted that the stop control of all the batting order plums including the batting order plum whose correct pushing order is the left 1st may be changed between the internal intermediate state and the non-internal intermediate state. Specifically, in the non-internal medium state, even if any of the plums in the batting order is won, the configuration may be such that the correct plum does not win regardless of the order of the stop operation, and the winning combination is one.

By the way, if the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, penalty control is executed, so the player normally performs the stop operation in the left 1st position. Therefore, in the configuration (for example, the above-mentioned modification) in which the correct plum does not win when the batting order plum whose correct pushing order is the left 1st is elected in the non-internal medium state, the correct plum does not win and the non-internal medium state is established. There is a circumstance that the intent can be grasped.

Further, as described above, when the set value is changed in the internal medium state, the state shifts to the non-internal medium state, and when the set value is not changed, the internal medium state is maintained. Therefore, in a configuration in which the correct plum does not win when the plum in the batting order of the left 1st correct pushing order wins in the non-internal medium state, the fact that the correct plum does not win the prize makes it possible to see through whether or not the set value has been changed. An inconvenience may occur. In the first embodiment, the stop control at the left 1st is common between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

(10) In the above-described first embodiment, the original (intended) gameplay is realized by proceeding with the game in the internal intermediate state. However, depending on the player, when the RBB combination is won in the non-internal medium state, there is a case where the symbol combination of the RBB combination is stopped and the transition to the internal medium state is not performed. Considering the above circumstances, it is preferable to employ a configuration that encourages the transition to the internal medium state.

As the above configuration, for example, a configuration is conceivable in which the acquisition expected value A in all stop operation sequences including the left 1st is uniformly larger in the internal medium state than in the non-internal medium state. Specifically, a “special plum” is provided as a winning area. The above special plums are won with a predetermined probability in the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. In addition, when a special plum is won in the internal middle state, a winning combination of 6 plums is won regardless of the stop operation mode (order, position). On the other hand, if a special plum is won in the non-internal medium state, a winning combination of 1 is won regardless of the stop operation mode.

According to the special plum, the acquisition expected value A in the internal medium state is larger by a predetermined number than in the non-internal medium state, regardless of the stopping operation order. Therefore, it is urged to shift to the internal middle state. If the special plum is won in the non-internal medium state, the 6-plume combination is won regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the special plum is won in the internal medium state, the 1-plume combination is won regardless of the stop operation mode. may be adopted. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the inconvenience that the internal medium state is excessively advantageous over the non-internal medium state is suppressed. Further, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the advantageous section is not started in the special plum winning game in each game state including the internal intermediate state. According to the above configuration, the advantage of suppressing the inconvenience that the internal middle state is excessively advantageous over the non-internal middle state becomes remarkably advantageous.

(11) In the first embodiment described above, a configuration is adopted in which the difference value X(J, H) does not change between the internal medium state and the non-internal medium state. However, a configuration in which the difference value X(J, H) changes between the internal middle state and the non-internal middle state may be adopted. The above configuration has the advantage of improving the winning probability of each winning area and the degree of freedom of stop control when the winning area is won. However, in a configuration in which the difference value X (J, H) changes between the internal middle state and the non-internal middle state, the relative advantage of each stop operation order (for example, left 1st push order) changes. . Therefore, depending on the player, there may be the inconvenience of being confused in which order the stop operation should be performed. The configuration of the first embodiment has the advantage of suppressing the above inconvenience.

(12) In the above-described first embodiment, the ready-to-win pattern 6 and the ready-to-win pattern 7 are provided as the winning areas that cause the difference value X to occur. Further, in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the first command of the reach target is not grouped. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the first commands of the batting order plum and the reach marks (including the reach number 6 and the reach number 7) are grouped. In other words, it may be configured such that it is not possible to grasp from the first command whether or not the winning area that causes the difference value X has been won. In the above configuration, each command may be transmitted to the sub-control board 400 at the time of the start operation during the non-instruction period.

(13) In the above-described first embodiment, when the above-described variable plum (such as plum CL (5, 6)) is won in a non-internal medium state, the main control issues a second command indicating "no instruction" (B99). It was transmitted from the board 300 to the sub-control board 400 . Also, when the variable plum is won in the non-internal medium state, the instruction by the instruction display 16 is not executed.

However, if the variable plum is won in the non-internal middle state, there is a possibility that you will miss one hand if you stop with the left 1st, but if you stop with the irregular pushing order (including the correct pushing order of the variable plum), you will definitely A one-card win is won (see FIG. 10(a)). That is, if the variable plum is won in the non-internal medium state, the irregular pushing order is more advantageous than the left 1st. Considering the above circumstances, if the variable plum is won in the non-internal medium state, the correct pushing order (any irregular pushing order) in the internal medium state will be changed in the same way as when the variable plum is won in the internal medium state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a second command indicating is transmitted. In addition, when the variable plum is won in the non-internal medium state, the correct order in the internal medium state is indicated by the instruction display 16 (instruction effect is executed) in the same way as when the variable plum is won in the internal medium state. ) configuration.

(14) In each form, the notification image and the notification sound are exemplified as a configuration for notifying that the stop operation has been performed in an irregular pressing order in a manner that does not result in a warning. However, the configuration for notifying that the stop operation has been performed in an irregular pressing order is not limited to the above example. For example, instead of announcing the message "Pressing from the middle (right)", the configuration may be such that a message "Pressing irregularly" is annunciated. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a message "recommended to press left" is notified.

FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram of the notification image GM3 in the modified example. In this modified example, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order during the non-instruction period (commonly for the middle 1st and the right 1st), the notification image GM3 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 30 . For example, the notification image GM3 is displayed at the time of the first stop, and then displayed until the time of the third stop. However, the timing at which the notification image GM3 is displayed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the notification image GM3 may be displayed for a predetermined period of time from the time of the third stop. Also, the notification image GM3 may be configured to continue to be displayed over a plurality of games. The notification image GM3 of the modified example is not displayed in the case of the left first stop, similarly to the notification image GM(1,2) of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the notification image GM3 displays that if the game is played with the left first stop, the transition to the BB state is likely to be determined, while the expected medal acquisition value A in each game decreases. Further, the notification image GM3 displays that if a game is played in an irregular pressing order, it becomes difficult to decide to shift to the BB state, but the expected medal acquisition value A in each game increases. According to the notification image GM3 described above, it is easy for the player to recognize that the game characteristics change between the case of playing the game with the left first stop and the case of playing the game with the irregular pressing order. Further, by displaying the notification image GM3 immediately after the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order, there is an advantage that the player can easily notice that the stop operation has been performed in the irregular pressing order.

FIG.32(b) is a figure for demonstrating another modification. In the modified example, the control executed by the sub CPU 412 is changed depending on whether the stop operation is performed by the left first stop or by the irregular pressing order. However, the control executed by the sub CPU 412 is common between the irregular pushing orders (middle 1st and right 1st).

Specifically, in the modification, each backlight corresponding to each reel 25 is provided as in the above-described first embodiment. Also, at the time of the third stop (at the time of payout of medals), a backlight effect may be executed. When the backlight effect is executed, each backlight flashes or goes out in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, the backlight is lit during the game period in which the backlight effect is not executed. In the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order in the game during the non-instruction period, all the backlights are turned off at the third stop. Specifically, regardless of whether or not it is determined to execute the backlight effect, the backlight is completely extinguished at the end of the game in which the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in the modification, the stop sound of each reel 12 changes depending on whether the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order or the left first stop during the non-instruction period. . Specifically, when the stop operation is performed at the left first stop, a normal stop sound is output in principle when the reels 12 (L, C, R) are stopped. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, a special stop sound is output when each reel 12 (L, C, R) stops.

The above special stop sound can be adopted not only as a warning sound but also as a normal stop sound. In the above specific example, the special stop sound is output at the first to third stops, but the special stop sound is output only at the first stop, and normal at the second and third stops. A configuration in which a stop sound is output may be employed. Further, in the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which no stop sound is output at the time of the second stop and the third stop. Furthermore, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the stop sound may not be output during the first to third stops.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in the modification, each image displayed by the liquid crystal display device 30 when the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order and when the stop operation is performed in the left first stop during the non-instruction period. color changes. Specifically, when the stop operation is performed at the left first stop, each image does not darken. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, each image is darkened. The timing for darkening each image may be the first stop time or the third stop time. Also, the timing of returning each darkened image to its original state is considered to be at the time of the third stop when the image was darkened at the time of the first stop. Further, each image that has been darkened at the timing when the bet medals are inserted to start the next game, or at the timing when the operation for starting the next game is performed, may be restored.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in the modified example, the presence or absence of the medal payout sound changes depending on whether the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order or the left first stop during the non-instruction period. . Specifically, when a winning combination is won in a game that is stopped by left first stop, a payout sound corresponding to the winning combination (payout number) is output. On the other hand, when a winning combination is won in a game in which the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, a payout sound corresponding to the winning combination is not output. The payout sound may change (the payout sound itself may be output in each case) depending on whether the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order or the left first stop.

In the above modification, some of the controls for turning off the backlight, changing the stop sound, darkening display of the liquid crystal display device 30, and omitting the dispensing sound are executed when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order. may

FIGS. 32(c-1) and 32(c-1) are diagrams for explaining still another modification. Although the details will be described later, even in this modified example, it is possible to prompt the player to play with the left first stop without issuing a warning.

FIG. 32(c-1) is a diagram for explaining the stop effect. FIG. 32(c-1) is a schematic diagram of each image displayed in the stop effect. For the sake of explanation, when the screen of the liquid crystal display device 30 is divided into three equal parts in the left-right direction, the area on the left side when viewed from the front is referred to as the left area ML, the central area is referred to as the middle area MC, and the area on the right side. is referred to as right region MR. In other words, the left region ML corresponds to the left stop button 25L, the middle region ML to the middle stop button 25C, and the right region MR to the right stop button 25R. In the modification, when the game start operation is performed (before the stop operation), it is determined whether or not the stop effect is to be executed in the game.

The specific example of FIG. 32(c-1) assumes a game in which the stop effect is executed immediately after the first stop operation is executed. As shown in FIG. 32(c-1), when the first stop operation is executed in a game in which the stop effect is executed, the stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML. In the stop effect described above, the stop image GX is displayed in the left region ML corresponding to (located near) the left stop button 25L when the stop operation is performed at the left first stop. There is an advantage that it is easy to draw attention to GX.

FIG. 32(c-2) is a diagram for explaining the area in which the stop image GX is displayed in the stop effect. As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the left first stop, the stop image GX is displayed in the left region ML. Further, even if the stop operation is performed in the middle first stop, the stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML, and even if the stop operation is performed in the right first stop, the stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML. An image GX is displayed.

In the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the stop image GX is not displayed in the area (MC, MR) corresponding to the stop button 25 subjected to the first stop operation, and the stop image GX is displayed in the left area ML. GX is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the display area of the stop image GX is unnatural when the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order, and is encouraged to play the game with the left first stop.

(15) In each form, the notification image and notification sound for notifying that the stop operation has been performed in an irregular pressing order may be changed as appropriate. Also, a plurality of types of notification images may be provided. For example, a different notification image may be provided for each production mode. Similarly, different notification sounds may be provided for each production mode. However, in each production mode, the notification image may be configured in common. Similarly, in each production mode, the notification sound may be configured in common.

(16) In each form, multiple types of normal states may be provided. For example, three types of normal states, normal state A, normal state B, and normal state C, may be provided. Further, in each of the normal states described above, it may be configured such that the easiness of winning in the BB state changes. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which normal state A, normal state B, and normal state C are easily shifted to the high-probability period in this order is conceivable.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which a normal state transfers to another normal state with a specific opportunity. For example, in a game in which a specific winning area is won, the mode transition lottery process is executed in the stop process. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the normal state is shifted at the opportunity of winning in the above mode transition lottery process. Furthermore, it is preferable that the normal state A transitions to the normal state B or the normal state C, but the normal state B or the normal state C does not transition to the normal state A. Similarly, a configuration in which normal state B shifts to normal state C, but normal state C does not shift to normal state B is preferable. In this modified example, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order in a game in which a specific winning area has been won, the above-described mode transition lottery process may be omitted. Further, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the winning probability in the mode transition lottery process may be changed to a low probability.

(17) In each form, the second command "B99" was sent as the "command that makes it impossible to specify the correct answer mode" during the non-instruction period in the game in which the specific group won. Also, in the game in which the specific group won, the second commands "B01" to "B06" corresponding to the instruction numbers (01 to 06) were transmitted as "commands capable of specifying the correct answer mode" during the instruction period. However, the "command whose correct mode cannot be specified" and the "command whose correct mode can be specified" are not limited to the above examples.

For example, in a game in which a specific group wins, the first command "A04" is transmitted as "a command in which the correct answer mode cannot be specified", and the types of plums in the batting order (Plum L, Plum LC, Plum LR, Plum CL, Plum CR, Plum RL, Plum RC) may be transmitted (for example, A04-1 to A04-6). With the above configuration, the correct mode can be specified from the first command in the non-instruction period. However, in the above configuration, as in the first embodiment, the configuration may be such that the second command is transmitted.

(18) In each form, the configuration for reporting a specific set value (set value "1") can be changed as appropriate. For example, assume a configuration in which a period during which a demo screen is displayed (hereinafter, “demonstration period”) starts when the non-game period continues for a predetermined period of time. In the above configuration, the demo screen is displayed during the period ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the aspect of the effect executing means is changed during the “demonstration period” hereinafter).

For example, during the demonstration period, the waist panel 6 (internal lamp) is lit in the normal control mode, and the waist panel 6 is turned off in the special mode. Also in the above configuration, the player can grasp whether or not the setting value "1" is set before playing the game. In the above configuration, it is preferable to start the demonstration period immediately after the setting value is changed (immediately after the setting change mode is finished).

(19) In each form, the configuration in which the main penalty control is not performed when the irregular pushing order is performed in the non-advantageous section has been adopted, but the configuration may be such that the main penalty control can be performed. As the configuration described above, for example, a configuration that executes main penalty control that makes processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section disadvantageous is conceivable.

(20) In the first embodiment, the main penalty control is executed regardless of the type of winning area when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order during a non-instruction period (excluding a non-advantageous section). However, in a game in which a specific winning area is won, the main penalty control may not be executed. For example, in a game in which Cherry (1, 2), Bell, Reach (1 to 7), or Replay (2, 3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "rare combination") is won, the main penalty control is not executed. good too. For example, in a game in which a rare combination is won, even if a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the determination condition lottery process may be executed and the specific counter may be updated. In addition, when a rare combination is won in a game in which a transition to the BB state is determined, the stock lottery process may be executed even when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order.

It should be noted that a part of the main penalty control may not be executed in a game in which a specific winning area (for example, a rare combination) is won. For example, in a game in which a rare combination is won, the determination condition lottery process may be executed, but the specific counter update process may be omitted.

(21) In the first embodiment, in the game in which the ceiling counter reaches the value "0", the preferential stock flag is turned ON. However, in a configuration in which the ceiling counter is decremented even when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the stop operation order of a game in which the ceiling counter reaches the numerical value "0" may be an irregular pressing order. In the above case, the stock lottery process may be executed with the stock preferential treatment flag turned off when the stop operation is performed in the irregular pushing order in the game in which the ceiling counter has reached the numerical value "0".

(22) In each form, the stock lottery process may be executed even in the BB state in which the preferential stock flag is OFF. For example, assume a configuration in which a premier BB state is provided as the BB state. In the above premier BB state, the BB stock is given at a higher probability in the stock lottery process of each game than in the BB state. In the above configuration, if the preferential stock flag is OFF, the stock lottery process is not executed during the BB state, but the stock lottery process may be exceptionally executed during the premium BB state.

However, in the above modified example, it is preferable to apply some kind of penalty when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order in a winning game in the premium BB state. For example, a configuration is assumed in which, when 1G consecutive stock is awarded in the premium BB state, the player moves to the BB state following the premium BB state (the BB state wins one game in a row). In the above configuration, it is preferable that the stock lottery process is not executed in each game in the BB state in which one game has been played in a row when the winning game in the premium BB state is stopped in an irregular order.

In the above configuration, the stock lottery process may not be executed in the BB state until all the 1G ream stocks given in the premier BB state are consumed. In addition, the stock lottery process is not executed in some BB states (for example, the first BB state) in which one game has been played in a row, and the stock lottery process is executed in other BB states (second and subsequent BB states). good too.

(23) In each form, the main penalty control can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above-described first embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in the irregular pressing order in the current game, the winning probability of the BB state in the next game is low. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning probability of the BB state in the current game is lowered when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order in the current game. Further, in the first embodiment, the ceiling counter updating process is omitted by the main penalty control, but the ceiling counter may be incremented by the main penalty control.

Also, assume a configuration in which a lottery (BB lottery) is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the BB state in the process at the start. In the above configuration, when a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order in the current game, the result of the BB lottery in the game may be rewritten. For example, assume a game in which the BB state is won in the BB lottery in the process at the start. Also, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order in the game. In the above case, for example, in the stop processing, a configuration is conceivable in which the result of the BB state is rewritten to "disappear". Also, in the stop processing, main penalty control that invalidates the result of the BB state may be adopted.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a BB lottery is executed in the start time process and the result of the BB lottery is invalidated in the stop time process, a command indicating the result of the BB lottery is transmitted to the sub CPU 412 immediately after the BB lottery is executed. It may be configured to be With the above configuration, although there is a possibility that the result of the BB lottery will be invalidated depending on the order of the subsequent stop operation, it is possible to execute the effect of notifying the result of the BB lottery early (for example, substantially at the same time as the start operation).

In a configuration in which a BB lottery is executed in the start time processing and the result of the BB lottery is invalidated in the stop time processing, an effect to notify the result of the BB lottery is executed at the time when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop. It may be configured to be With the above configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the BB lottery when it is substantially determined that the result of the BB lottery will not be invalidated.

In the above-described main penalty control of the first embodiment, updating processing of specific counters (ceiling counters, etc.) excluding the high security certificate counter in the game stopped by the irregular pushing order is omitted. In place of the above configuration, the update processing of the specific counter is executed in the game start processing, and when the stop operation is performed in the game in an irregular pushing order, the specific counter is set to the value immediately before the update processing in the stop processing. It is good also as a structure which returns.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, both the determination condition lottery process and the high-probability transition lottery are omitted. Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which only one of the lotteries can be omitted.

(24) In each form, a configuration may be adopted in which sub-penalty control is executed when a stop operation is performed in an unadvantageous section due to an irregular pushing order. Specifically, when a stopping operation is performed in an irregular pressing order in a non-advantageous section, the sub-penalty control may be executed while the main penalty control is not executed, and the effect being executed may be stopped.

(25) In each form, the content of the sub-penalty control may be changed as appropriate. For example, a configuration is assumed in which a plurality of types of production stages are provided in a specific state (for example, normal state) of the non-instruction period. In each production stage, for example, the place (background image) where the character GC stays is different. As each of the production stages described above, a production stage in which an image of the character GC staying in the mountains is displayed and an production stage in which an image of the character GC staying in the city are displayed can be considered. Each production stage described above is switched, for example, at random timing. Also, when the production stage is switched, a switching image is displayed on the entire screen.

In the above configuration, when the sub-penalty control is executed, it may be configured to forcibly switch to a specific production stage (hereinafter, "default stage"). In addition, if a production stage that is easy to stay in a high-probability period (hereinafter “high-probability stage”) and a production stage that is easy to stay in a low-probability period (hereinafter “low-probability stage”) are provided, low-probability suggestions The stage is preferably taken as the default stage. Also, when switching to the default stage by sub-penalty control, it is preferable that the switching image is not displayed.

(26) In each form, at the time of the first stop (middle first stop, right first stop), the effect image is switched to the default state image at substantially the same time as the notification image is displayed. However, the timing at which the notification image is displayed may differ from the timing at which the effect image is switched to the image in the default state. For example, instead of the above configuration, a notification image may be displayed at the time of the first stop, after that, an effect image may be displayed until the time of the third stop, and an image in the default state may be displayed at the trigger of the third stop operation. good.

(27) In each form, the combination of symbols displayed in the pseudo-game (pachislot effect) may be changed depending on the presence or absence of main penalty control. For example, in a pseudo-game when the BB state or EDBB state is started, any of the symbol combinations of "red seven-red seven-red seven", "gold seven-gold seven-gold seven" or "BAR-BAR-BAR" Assume a configuration in which is displayed. When the EDBB state is started, "BAR-BAR-BAR" is displayed in the pseudo-game. Also, when the BB state is started, either "red seven-red seven-red seven" or "gold seven-gold seven-gold seven" is determined by lottery, and the determined pattern combination is a pseudo-game displayed in

In the above configuration, a configuration is conceivable in which the symbol combination to be displayed in the pseudo-game is drawn by lottery according to the number of BB stocks when the BB state is started. Specifically, the greater the number of BB stocks, the more likely it is that "Gold 7-Gold 7-Gold 7" will be determined. As described above, when the main penalty control is executed, the stock lottery process becomes disadvantageous. Therefore, when the main penalty control is executed, "red seven-red seven-red seven" is likely to be determined at the start of the BB state.

However, the presence or absence of the main penalty control may be configured so as not to affect the symbol combination displayed in the pseudo-game. As the above configuration, for example, a configuration is conceivable in which the symbol combination displayed in the pseudo-game is determined regardless of the number of BB stocks at the start of the BB state. In addition, as in the above modification, a premier BB state is provided, and when the premier BB state is won, a predetermined dedicated pseudo-game (pachislot performance) is executed regardless of the presence or absence of main penalty control. may be configured.

(28) In each form, a period during which the main penalty control is not executed even if the stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order is provided during the non-instruction period (the period during which the instruction by the instruction display 16 is not executed) in the advantageous section. may For example, a chance state in which the transition to the BB state is likely to be determined may be provided, and the main penalty control may not be executed in the chance state. In the above configuration, the main penalty control may not be executed only for a specific game in the chance state. Further, in the non-internal medium state, the main penalty control may not be executed. Similarly, the main penalty control may not be executed in the bonus operating state.

(29) In each of the above forms, for example, in the non-internal medium state, cherry 1 in the winning area is won with a probability of "X/65536", and duplicate combination 2 (cherry 1) is won with a probability of "Y/65536". (X and Y are positive integers). In the above configuration, Cherry 1 wins with a probability of "(X+Y)/65536" in the internal middle state. Furthermore, in the bonus activated state, Cherry 1 wins with a probability of "X/65536". In the above configuration, when Cherry 1 is won or when Double Win 2 is won in the non-internal medium state, the advantageous section is started. In addition, when Cherry 1 is won in the bonus operation state, the advantageous section is started. However, if Cherry 1 is won in the internal intermediate state (game state in which the player stays in principle), the advantageous section does not start.

In the above configuration, the advantageous section transition processing when cherry 1 wins may be configured to be more advantageous than when another winning area (hereinafter referred to as "disadvantageous winning area") wins. For example, in the advantageous section transition processing when Cherry 1 is won, the transition to the BB state may always be determined. In the above configuration, for example, when the BB state transitions to the bonus operating state, the advantageous section ends in the bonus operating state, and then Cherry 1 is won during the bonus operating state and the advantageous section starts, The first ball-out state in the advantageous section is the BB state.

However, it is possible to shift to the bonus operation state at any time by stopping the display of the RBB combination. Therefore, if an advantageous interval is likely to end in the bonus operating state (a new advantageous interval is likely to start in the bonus operating state), the player may experience an excessive advantage. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to configure the advantageous section to end in the bonus operating state only when a predetermined trigger is established. For example, the main CPU 301 executes a predetermined lottery, the advantageous interval ends in the bonus operating state after winning the lottery, and the advantageous interval does not end in the bonus operating state shifted to when the lottery has not been won. can be considered.

(30) In each of the above forms, in a game in which a specific winning area (hereinafter referred to as a "transition winning area") is won in a non-advantageous interval, processing at the time of transition to an advantageous interval is executed, and a special lottery is performed according to the type of transition winning area. It is good also as a structure by which the presence or absence of changes. Furthermore, it may be possible to comprehend (or guess) whether or not the transfer winning area has been won according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which a specific symbol combination is stop-displayed only in a game in which a transition winning area is won. Also, a configuration is conceivable in which a specific symbol combination is likely to be stopped and displayed in a game in which the transition winning area is won.

(31) In the first embodiment, the drop lottery in the pullback state, the high-probability drop lottery, and the subtraction of the high security certificate counter are executed in the starting process. Also, in the stop processing, subtraction of the ceiling counter, determination condition lottery processing, stock lottery processing, and high-probability transition lottery were executed. That is, among the processes related to the instruction function, each process that is disadvantageous to the player is executed in the start process, and each process that is advantageous to the player is executed in the stop process. In addition, each processing that is advantageous to the player in the stop processing is all disadvantageous (or omitted) by the main penalty control, while each processing that is disadvantageous to the player in the start processing is It is configured so that it is not omitted. However, the starting process may include a process that is disadvantageous due to the main penalty control. Further, when the main penalty control is executed, a part of each process that puts the player at a disadvantage may be omitted.

(32) In each form, the stop operation order in which the main penalty control is executed may be changed as appropriate. For example, during the non-instruction period, the main penalty control may be executed for the right first stop in the irregular pushing order, and the main penalty control may not be executed for other stop operation orders (including the middle first stop).

(33) In each form, a unilaterally advantageous stop operation sequence is provided in both the non-internal medium state and the internal medium state. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a unilaterally advantageous stop operation sequence is provided for only one of the non-internal medium state and the internal medium state and not provided for the other. As the configuration described above, in the first embodiment, in the non-internal medium state, a configuration in which the medal acquisition expected value is common regardless of the stop operation order is conceivable. In the above configuration, the main penalty control is not executed when the stopping operation is performed in the non-internal medium state with the irregular pushing order, and the main penalty control is executed when the stopping operation is performed in the internal medium state with the irregular pushing order. may be

(34) In each form, the normal state may in principle be a high-probability period. For example, if a high probability counter is provided and the value of the high probability counter is equal to or greater than "1", the high probability period is considered. In the above configuration, a lottery (hereinafter referred to as "hit lottery") is made as to whether or not to shift to the BB state in the start process. In the winning lottery described above, it is easier to win during the high probability period than during the low probability period. In addition, in the modification, in each game, the value "1" is subtracted from the high probability counter immediately after the winning lottery regardless of the winning area of the game, and the value "1" is added to the high probability counter in the stop processing. is added. Therefore, the high-probability counter at the start of each game is basically a numerical value of "1". That is, each game becomes a principle high probability period. However, in the game in which the stop operation is performed in an irregular pushing order, the high accuracy counter is not added. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in an irregular pressing order, the low probability period starts from the next game. In each game in the low-probability period, the high-probability counter is incremented by "1" with a probability of about 1/10. In other words, once the low-probability period is entered, the low-probability period continues for about 10 games on average.

(35) In each form, due to the main penalty control, each process (judgment condition lottery process, etc.) that does not refer to the winning area is disadvantageous (low probability, omitted), but the winning area is referred to A configuration in which each process is disadvantageous may be adopted. For example, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the BB state in the game with a probability according to the winning area of the game this time. However, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the stop operation order in which the main penalty control is not performed is notified in the game in which the lottery is performed. For example, even in a game in which the common bell 1 wins the bell role regardless of the stop operation order, if the above lottery is disadvantageous due to the irregular pushing order, the instruction display 16 instructs the left first stop. is preferred.

(36) In each form, it is possible to shift to the bonus operating state in the advantageous section, but the ceiling counter may not be updated in the bonus operating state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the number-of-games image GE (see FIG. 24(a) described above) is not updated before and after the bonus operation state. Further, in the above configuration, the number-of-games image GE may be hidden during the bonus operation state.

(37) In each form, if the left 1st correct hitting order plum is won during the non-instruction period, the incorrect hitting order may be indicated by the instruction display 16 . Further, when the stop operation is performed in the instructed incorrect pressing order, the main penalty control is not executed, but when the stop operation is performed in the uninstructed pressing order, the main penalty control is executed. In the instruction period, the correct pressing order of the batting order plum is instructed.

(38) The present invention can be applied not only to the pachislot machines described above, but also to pachinko machines, other game machines, and game machines in general. It goes without saying that the control in each of the modifications described above can be executed regardless of the game state.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention comprises a game starting means for starting a game using a specified number of game values, and a pattern capable of displaying a plurality of types of symbols in each game while variably displaying a combination of symbols as a result of the game. display means (each reel 12); game value imparting means (display determination process) capable of imparting a number of game values corresponding to the symbol combination; stop operation means (each stop button 25) capable of performing a stop operation in an order (irregular pressing order); winning combination determining means for determining any one of a plurality of types of winning combinations with a probability according to the game state; and stop. Symbol variation control means (stop control processing) for stopping and displaying a symbol combination according to operation timing , stop operation order and winning combination; An internal state shifting means capable of shifting to an internal medium state in which a state in which a special winning combination is won can be maintained in a plurality of games, and a transition to a special state when the symbol combination of the special winning combination among the symbol combinations is stop-displayed. instruction means (instruction indicator 16) capable of instructing an advantageous stopping operation order ; transition determining means for deciding transition to an instruction period in which an advantageous stopping operation order is indicated; an instruction function control means (processing at the time of stop) capable of making it difficult to determine the transition to the instruction period when the stop operation is performed in the second order compared to when the stop operation is performed in the first order in the state; , is an expected value of the game value to be given in the game in which the stop operation is performed at random timing, and the expected acquisition value determined for each combination of the game state and the order of the stop operation is the first order in the internal middle state compared to the second order, the first order includes a plurality of kinds of stop operation orders (left-center-right, left-right-center), and in the internal middle state, each stop operation order of the first order has an acquisition expectation When the value difference (difference value XJ) becomes less than a predetermined value (Nx "0.01"), and the transition from the non-internal medium state to the internal medium state occurs, the amount of increase in the acquired expected value is Greater in the second order than in the first order .

1 Game Machine 300 Main Control Board 301 Main CPU 302 Main ROM 303 Main RAM 304 Random Number Generator 305 I/F Circuit 400 Sub Control Board 410 Effect Control Board , 411 I/F circuit 412 sub CPU 413 sub ROM 414 sub RAM 420 image control board 421 image control CPU 422 image control ROM 423 VDP 424 CGROM 425 ... RAM, 430 ... sound board, 431 ... sound source IC, 432 ... sound source ROM.

Claims (1)

a game starting means for starting a game using a specified number of game values;
a symbol display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols in each game and stop-displaying a symbol combination as a result of the game;
a game value imparting means capable of imparting a number of game values corresponding to the symbol combination;
stop operation means capable of stop operation in a first order and a second order different from the first order;
winning combination determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of winning combinations with a probability according to a game state;
symbol variation control means for stop-displaying the symbol combination according to the timing of the stop operation , the order of the stop operation and the winning combination ;
an internal state transition means capable of shifting to an internal state in which, when a special winning combination among the plurality of types of winning combinations is won in a non-internal medium state, the state in which the special winning combination is won can be maintained in a plurality of games;
special state shifting means for shifting to a special state when the symbol combination of the special winning combination among the symbol combinations is stop-displayed;
an indication means capable of indicating an advantageous stopping operation sequence;
a transition determining means for determining transition to an indicated period in which a favorable order of shutdown operations is indicated;
Instruction function control means capable of making it more difficult to determine the transition to the instruction period when the stop operation is performed in the second order in the internal intermediate state, compared to when the stop operation is performed in the first order. and
It is an expected value of the game value to be given in the game in which the stop operation is performed at random timing, and the expected acquisition value determined for each combination of the game state and the order of the stop operation is compared with the first order in the internal intermediate state. and most in said second order,
The first order includes a plurality of types of stop operation orders,
in the internal medium state, the difference in the expected acquisition value between the stop operation orders of the first order is less than a predetermined value ;
The amount of increase in the acquisition expected value when transitioning from the non-internal intermediate state to the internal intermediate state is greater in the second order than in the first order.
game machine.

Images